OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc/openrisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [gnu-old/] [gdb-7.1/] [gdb/] [doc/] [gdbint.texinfo] - Blame information for rev 862

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 227 jeremybenn
\input texinfo   @c -*- texinfo -*-
2
@setfilename gdbint.info
3
@include gdb-cfg.texi
4
@settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
5
@setchapternewpage off
6
@dircategory Software development
7
@direntry
8
* Gdb-Internals: (gdbint).      The GNU debugger's internals.
9
@end direntry
10
 
11
@copying
12
Copyright @copyright{} 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999,
13
2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2010
14
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
15
Contributed by Cygnus Solutions.  Written by John Gilmore.
16
Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
17
 
18
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
19
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
20
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
21
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
22
Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
23
Free Documentation License''.
24
@end copying
25
 
26
@ifnottex
27
This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
28
 
29
@insertcopying
30
@end ifnottex
31
 
32
 
33
@syncodeindex fn cp
34
@syncodeindex vr cp
35
 
36
@titlepage
37
@title @value{GDBN} Internals
38
@subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
39
@author John Gilmore
40
@author Cygnus Solutions
41
@author Second Edition:
42
@author Stan Shebs
43
@author Cygnus Solutions
44
@page
45
@tex
46
\def\$#1${{#1}}  % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
47
\xdef\manvers{\$Revision$}  % For use in headers, footers too
48
{\parskip=0pt
49
\hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
50
\hfill \manvers\par
51
\hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
52
}
53
@end tex
54
 
55
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
56
@insertcopying
57
@end titlepage
58
 
59
@contents
60
 
61
@node Top
62
@c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
63
@c not for TeX).  Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
64
@top Scope of this Document
65
 
66
This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}.  It
67
includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
68
as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
69
 
70
@menu
71
* Summary::
72
* Overall Structure::
73
* Algorithms::
74
* User Interface::
75
* libgdb::
76
* Values::
77
* Stack Frames::
78
* Symbol Handling::
79
* Language Support::
80
* Host Definition::
81
* Target Architecture Definition::
82
* Target Descriptions::
83
* Target Vector Definition::
84
* Native Debugging::
85
* Support Libraries::
86
* Coding::
87
* Porting GDB::
88
* Versions and Branches::
89
* Start of New Year Procedure::
90
* Releasing GDB::
91
* Testsuite::
92
* Hints::
93
 
94
* GDB Observers::  @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
95
* GNU Free Documentation License::  The license for this documentation
96
* Index::
97
@end menu
98
 
99
@node Summary
100
@chapter Summary
101
 
102
@menu
103
* Requirements::
104
* Contributors::
105
@end menu
106
 
107
@node Requirements
108
@section Requirements
109
@cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
110
 
111
Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
112
requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}.  Although some
113
of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
114
that have run counter to these requirements.
115
 
116
First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger.  It's not designed to be a
117
front panel for embedded systems.  It's not a text editor.  It's not a
118
shell.  It's not a programming environment.
119
 
120
@value{GDBN} is an interactive tool.  Although a batch mode is
121
available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
122
programmer.
123
 
124
@value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user.  A programmer hot on
125
the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
126
going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
127
to debugger commands.
128
 
129
@value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
130
While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
131
picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
132
programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
133
mollify the debugger.
134
 
135
@value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
136
Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
137
heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
138
 
139
@value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere.  No other debugger is
140
available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
141
supports.
142
 
143
@node Contributors
144
@section Contributors
145
 
146
The first edition of this document was written by John Gilmore of
147
Cygnus Solutions. The current second edition was written by Stan Shebs
148
of Cygnus Solutions, who continues to update the manual.
149
 
150
Over the years, many others have made additions and changes to this
151
document. This section attempts to record the significant contributors
152
to that effort. One of the virtues of free software is that everyone
153
is free to contribute to it; with regret, we cannot actually
154
acknowledge everyone here.
155
 
156
@quotation
157
@emph{Plea:} This section has only been added relatively recently (four
158
years after publication of the second edition). Additions to this
159
section are particularly welcome.  If you or your friends (or enemies,
160
to be evenhanded) have been unfairly omitted from this list, we would
161
like to add your names!
162
@end quotation
163
 
164
A document such as this relies on being kept up to date by numerous
165
small updates by contributing engineers as they make changes to the
166
code base. The file @file{ChangeLog} in the @value{GDBN} distribution
167
approximates a blow-by-blow account. The most prolific contributors to
168
this important, but low profile task are Andrew Cagney (responsible
169
for over half the entries), Daniel Jacobowitz, Mark Kettenis, Jim
170
Blandy and Eli Zaretskii.
171
 
172
Eli Zaretskii and Daniel Jacobowitz wrote the sections documenting
173
watchpoints.
174
 
175
Jeremy Bennett updated the sections on initializing a new architecture
176
and register representation, and added the section on Frame Interpretation.
177
 
178
 
179
@node Overall Structure
180
 
181
@chapter Overall Structure
182
 
183
@value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
184
symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
185
@dfn{target side}).
186
 
187
The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
188
supporting code.
189
 
190
The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
191
interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
192
parsing, type and value printing.
193
 
194
The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
195
physical target manipulation.
196
 
197
The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
198
number of exceptions.  For instance, core file support involves symbolic
199
elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
200
supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers).  Instead,
201
this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
202
should fit together.
203
 
204
@section The Symbol Side
205
 
206
The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
207
you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
208
For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
209
many kinds of expressions.
210
 
211
@section The Target Side
212
 
213
The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
214
Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
215
of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
216
available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
217
 
218
Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
219
display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all.  In some cases,
220
such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
221
relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
222
way.
223
 
224
@section Configurations
225
 
226
@cindex host
227
@cindex target
228
@dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
229
@dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
230
executes.  In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
231
third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
232
 
233
Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host
234
support.  Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte
235
order, host float format.  These are all calculated by @code{autoconf}
236
when the debugger is built.
237
 
238
Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
239
dependent.  Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
240
breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
241
to call a function.
242
 
243
Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
244
is native dependent.  One example is Unix child process support; if the
245
host and target are not the same, calling @code{fork} to start the target
246
process is a bad idea.  The various macros needed for finding the
247
registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
248
in the native-dependent files.
249
 
250
Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
251
are really part of the target environment, but which require
252
@code{#include} files that are only available on the host system.  Core
253
file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
254
 
255
When you want to make @value{GDBN} work as the traditional native debugger
256
on a system, you will need to supply both target and native information.
257
 
258
@section Source Tree Structure
259
@cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
260
 
261
The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
262
are only a few subdirectories.  A file's name usually gives a hint as
263
to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
264
@file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
265
 
266
Files that are related to some common task have names that share
267
common substrings.  For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
268
debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
269
reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
270
deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
271
parlance for the program being debugged).
272
 
273
There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
274
@samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
275
files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
276
(sparc, mips, etc).  Usually, only one of these will be used in a
277
specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
278
 
279
Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
280
debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
281
native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
282
 
283
The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
284
 
285
@table @file
286
@item cli
287
Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
288
Interpreter.  @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
289
 
290
@item gdbserver
291
Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
292
 
293
@item gdbtk
294
Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
295
 
296
@item mi
297
The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
298
 
299
@item signals
300
Target signal translation code.
301
 
302
@item tui
303
Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
304
Interface.  @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
305
@end table
306
 
307
@node Algorithms
308
 
309
@chapter Algorithms
310
@cindex algorithms
311
 
312
@value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms.  They are
313
often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
314
cases and real-world issues.  This chapter describes the basic
315
algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
316
they use.
317
 
318
@section Prologue Analysis
319
 
320
@cindex prologue analysis
321
@cindex call frame information
322
@cindex CFI (call frame information)
323
To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
324
variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
325
of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
326
saved.  Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
327
younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
328
scattered unpredictably across younger frames.  This means that
329
changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
330
may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
331
 
332
Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
333
which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
334
But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
335
technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
336
registers.  A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
337
code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
338
allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
339
register, save registers, and so on.  Obviously, this can't be done
340
accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
341
helpful.  Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
342
CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
343
@value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
344
calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
345
 
346
In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
347
target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
348
optimizers.  Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
349
write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
350
understand all the prologues GCC would generate.  However, over time
351
GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
352
understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
353
themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
354
and fragile.  Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
355
instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
356
 
357
@cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
358
@cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
359
@cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
360
To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
361
and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
362
prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
363
analyzers.  When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
364
framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
365
``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
366
using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
367
would hold when the code actually runs.  For example, if our function
368
starts with the instruction:
369
 
370
@example
371
addi r1, 42     # add 42 to r1
372
@end example
373
@noindent
374
we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
375
this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
376
value.
377
 
378
If we then see an instruction like:
379
 
380
@example
381
addi r1, 22     # add 22 to r1
382
@end example
383
@noindent
384
we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
385
it is now 64 greater than its original value.
386
 
387
If the next instruction were:
388
 
389
@example
390
mov r2, r1      # set r2 to r1's value
391
@end example
392
@noindent
393
then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
394
@code{r1} plus 64.
395
 
396
It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
397
need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
398
registers.  So after an instruction like this:
399
 
400
@example
401
mov (fp+4), r2
402
@end example
403
@noindent
404
then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
405
holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
406
 
407
And so on.
408
 
409
Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable.  If we
410
wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
411
the instruction:
412
 
413
@example
414
xor r1, r3      # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
415
@end example
416
@noindent
417
then things would get pretty complex.  But remember, we're just doing
418
a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
419
relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
420
``unknown''.  We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
421
information is acceptable for our application.
422
 
423
So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
424
approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
425
never inaccurate.
426
 
427
Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
428
machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
429
contents of registers and memory instead of actual values.  Starting
430
from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
431
current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
432
Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
433
kept track of.
434
 
435
@itemize @bullet
436
 
437
@item
438
To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
439
stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
440
minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
441
If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
442
the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
443
we don't know the frame size.
444
 
445
@item
446
To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
447
search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
448
registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
449
original value.  If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
450
to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
451
anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
452
@end itemize
453
 
454
This does take some work.  But prologue analyzers aren't
455
quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
456
forms any more; they're big, hairy functions.  Along with inferior
457
function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
458
of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port.  So it's
459
worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
460
and maintain.  In the approach described above:
461
 
462
@itemize @bullet
463
 
464
@item
465
It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
466
whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
467
the effect of each instruction.
468
 
469
@item
470
It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
471
instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
472
wasn't already broken before.
473
 
474
@item
475
It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
476
complicate the code for each instruction.  As long as your domain
477
of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
478
what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
479
already gathering the right data for you.
480
 
481
@end itemize
482
 
483
The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
484
the framework and how to use it.
485
 
486
 
487
@section Breakpoint Handling
488
 
489
@cindex breakpoints
490
In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
491
where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
492
that location.
493
 
494
There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
495
breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
496
 
497
@cindex hardware breakpoints
498
@cindex program counter
499
Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
500
features with some chips.  Typically these work by having dedicated
501
register into which the breakpoint address may be stored.  If the PC
502
(shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
503
ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
504
exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
505
 
506
Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
507
include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
508
processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
509
address.
510
 
511
A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
512
breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
513
software breakpoints.  So although these are not literally ``hardware
514
breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
515
@value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
516
for something to happen.
517
 
518
Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
519
limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
520
start trying to set software breakpoints.  (On some architectures,
521
notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
522
whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
523
breakpoints and watchpoints.  On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
524
an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
525
 
526
@cindex software breakpoints
527
Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
528
The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
529
instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
530
that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
531
@value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program.  When the
532
user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
533
instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
534
 
535
Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
536
must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM.  It
537
can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
538
although such a situation would be highly unusual.
539
 
540
Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
541
instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
542
target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
543
breakpoint instruction.  (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
544
larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
545
targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
546
instructions may jumped to.)  Note that it's possible for an instruction
547
set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
548
although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
549
instruction.
550
 
551
Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}.  However,
552
much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
553
 
554
@table @code
555
@cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
556
@findex target_remove_breakpoint
557
@findex target_insert_breakpoint
558
@item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
559
@itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
560
Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
561
@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
562
non-zero for failure.  On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
563
breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero.  The fields of the
564
@code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
565
to contain other information about the breakpoint on output.  The field
566
@code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
567
related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
568
contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
569
if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
570
underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
571
memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
572
@code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
573
it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
574
 
575
For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
576
shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero.  However,
577
the length reported by @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} is cached in
578
@code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
579
used to remove the breakpoint.
580
 
581
@cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
582
@findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
583
@findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
584
@item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
585
@itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
586
Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
587
@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
588
non-zero for failure.  See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
589
a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
590
@var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
591
@code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
592
but @code{placed_size} may be.
593
@end table
594
 
595
@section Single Stepping
596
 
597
@section Signal Handling
598
 
599
@section Thread Handling
600
 
601
@section Inferior Function Calls
602
 
603
@section Longjmp Support
604
 
605
@cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
606
@value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
607
@code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
608
stepping.  This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
609
which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
610
command.
611
 
612
@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
613
To make this work, you need to define a function called
614
@code{gdbarch_get_longjmp_target}, which will examine the
615
@code{jmp_buf} structure and extract the @code{longjmp} target address.
616
Since @code{jmp_buf} is target specific and typically defined in a
617
target header not available to @value{GDBN}, you will need to
618
determine the offset of the PC manually and return that; many targets
619
define a @code{jb_pc_offset} field in the tdep structure to save the
620
value once calculated.
621
 
622
@section Watchpoints
623
@cindex watchpoints
624
 
625
Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
626
breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
627
instruction is executed.  When you have data which changes without
628
your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
629
hunt down and kill such bugs.
630
 
631
@cindex hardware watchpoints
632
@cindex software watchpoints
633
Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
634
known as ``software watchpoints.''  @value{GDBN} always uses
635
hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
636
software watchpoints otherwise.  Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
637
will use software watchpoints are:
638
 
639
@itemize @bullet
640
@item
641
The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
642
watchpoint support.  For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
643
to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
644
more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
645
watchpoints.
646
 
647
@item
648
The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
649
registers (as opposed to memory).
650
 
651
@item
652
Too many different watchpoints requested.  (On some architectures,
653
this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
654
resumed.)  Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
655
breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
656
breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
657
 
658
@item
659
No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
660
implementation.
661
@end itemize
662
 
663
Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
664
single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
665
watched expression(s) after each instruction.  The rest of this
666
section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
667
 
668
When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
669
possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
670
It first uses @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to see if any watchpoint
671
was hit.  If not, all watchpoint checking is skipped.
672
 
673
Then @value{GDBN} calls @code{target_stopped_data_address} exactly
674
once.  This method returns the address of the watchpoint which
675
triggered, if the target can determine it.  If the triggered address
676
is available, @value{GDBN} compares the address returned by this
677
method with each watched memory address in each active watchpoint.
678
For data-read and data-access watchpoints, @value{GDBN} announces
679
every watchpoint that watches the triggered address as being hit.
680
For this reason, data-read and data-access watchpoints
681
@emph{require} that the triggered address be available; if not, read
682
and access watchpoints will never be considered hit.  For data-write
683
watchpoints, if the triggered address is available, @value{GDBN}
684
considers only those watchpoints which match that address;
685
otherwise, @value{GDBN} considers all data-write watchpoints.  For
686
each data-write watchpoint that @value{GDBN} considers, it evaluates
687
the expression whose value is being watched, and tests whether the
688
watched value has changed.  Watchpoints whose watched values have
689
changed are announced as hit.
690
 
691
@c FIXME move these to the main lists of target/native defns
692
 
693
@value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
694
watchpoints:
695
 
696
@table @code
697
@findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
698
@item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
699
Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
700
possible to be set.  The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
701
of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
702
not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
703
number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set.  @var{other}
704
is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
705
are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
706
the same time).
707
 
708
@findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
709
@item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
710
Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
711
whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
712
 
713
@cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
714
@findex target_insert_watchpoint
715
@findex target_remove_watchpoint
716
@item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
717
@itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
718
Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
719
@var{len} bytes.  @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
720
possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
721
defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
722
 
723
@smallexample
724
 enum target_hw_bp_type
725
   @{
726
     hw_write   = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
727
     hw_read    = 1, /* Read    HW watchpoint */
728
     hw_access  = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
729
     hw_execute = 3  /* Execute HW breakpoint */
730
   @};
731
@end smallexample
732
 
733
@noindent
734
These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
735
 
736
@findex target_stopped_data_address
737
@item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
738
If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
739
associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
740
@var{addr_p} and return non-zero.  Otherwise, return zero.  This
741
is required for data-read and data-access watchpoints.  It is
742
not required for data-write watchpoints, but @value{GDBN} uses
743
it to improve handling of those also.
744
 
745
@value{GDBN} will only call this method once per watchpoint stop,
746
immediately after calling @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}.  If the
747
target's watchpoint indication is sticky, i.e., stays set after
748
resuming, this method should clear it.  For instance, the x86 debug
749
control register has sticky triggered flags.
750
 
751
@findex target_watchpoint_addr_within_range
752
@item target_watchpoint_addr_within_range (@var{target}, @var{addr}, @var{start}, @var{length})
753
Check whether @var{addr} (as returned by @code{target_stopped_data_address})
754
lies within the hardware-defined watchpoint region described by
755
@var{start} and @var{length}.  This only needs to be provided if the
756
granularity of a watchpoint is greater than one byte, i.e., if the
757
watchpoint can also trigger on nearby addresses outside of the watched
758
region.
759
 
760
@findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
761
@item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
762
If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
763
watchpoint to step over it.  Like @code{gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint},
764
this is usually set when watchpoints trigger at the instruction
765
which will perform an interesting read or write.  It should be
766
set if there is a temporary disable bit which allows the processor
767
to step over the interesting instruction without raising the
768
watchpoint exception again.
769
 
770
@findex gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint
771
@item int gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint (@var{gdbarch})
772
If it returns a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
773
watchpoint to step the inferior over it.  This is usually set when
774
watchpoints trigger at the instruction which will perform an
775
interesting read or write.
776
 
777
@findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
778
@item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
779
If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
780
inferior after a watchpoint has been hit.  This is usually set
781
when watchpoints trigger at the instruction following an interesting
782
read or write.
783
 
784
@findex CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
785
@item CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
786
If this is defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} will remove all
787
watchpoints before stepping the inferior.
788
 
789
@findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
790
@item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
791
Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint.  @var{wait_status} is of
792
the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
793
Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
794
the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
795
type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
796
target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
797
the @var{wait_status} argument.
798
 
799
@value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
800
@code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
801
determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
802
it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
803
@end table
804
 
805
@subsection Watchpoints and Threads
806
@cindex watchpoints, with threads
807
 
808
@value{GDBN} only supports process-wide watchpoints, which trigger
809
in all threads.  @value{GDBN} uses the thread ID to make watchpoints
810
act as if they were thread-specific, but it cannot set hardware
811
watchpoints that only trigger in a specific thread.  Therefore, even
812
if the target supports threads, per-thread debug registers, and
813
watchpoints which only affect a single thread, it should set the
814
per-thread debug registers for all threads to the same value.  On
815
@sc{gnu}/Linux native targets, this is accomplished by using
816
@code{ALL_LWPS} in @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and
817
@code{target_remove_watchpoint} and by using
818
@code{linux_set_new_thread} to register a handler for newly created
819
threads.
820
 
821
@value{GDBN}'s @sc{gnu}/Linux support only reports a single event
822
at a time, although multiple events can trigger simultaneously for
823
multi-threaded programs.  When multiple events occur, @file{linux-nat.c}
824
queues subsequent events and returns them the next time the program
825
is resumed.  This means that @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} and
826
@code{target_stopped_data_address} only need to consult the current
827
thread's state---the thread indicated by @code{inferior_ptid}.  If
828
two threads have hit watchpoints simultaneously, those routines
829
will be called a second time for the second thread.
830
 
831
@subsection x86 Watchpoints
832
@cindex x86 debug registers
833
@cindex watchpoints, on x86
834
 
835
The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
836
registers designed to facilitate debugging.  @value{GDBN} provides a
837
generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
838
support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints.  This
839
subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
840
 
841
(At present, the library functions read and write debug registers directly, and are
842
thus only available for native configurations.)
843
 
844
To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
845
following:
846
 
847
@itemize @bullet
848
@findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
849
@item
850
Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
851
target-dependent headers.
852
 
853
@item
854
Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
855
defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
856
 
857
@item
858
Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
859
@code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}).
860
 
861
@item
862
Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
863
below.  Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
864
which does the real work.
865
@end itemize
866
 
867
The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
868
debug registers.  Values are copied between the mirror images and the
869
real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
870
provide:
871
 
872
@table @code
873
@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
874
@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
875
Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
876
 
877
@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
878
@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
879
Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
880
 
881
@findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
882
@item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
883
Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
884
number @var{idx}.
885
 
886
@findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
887
@item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
888
Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register.  This value is
889
used immediately after it is returned by
890
@code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
891
register values.
892
@end table
893
 
894
For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
895
that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
896
to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints.  This
897
allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
898
expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
899
wasting debug registers which are in short supply.  @value{GDBN}
900
maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
901
anything to use this feature.
902
 
903
The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
904
bytes long.  The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
905
be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
906
region on 4-byte boundary.  However, the x86 watchpoint support in
907
@value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
908
bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
909
a single region.  This allocation of several registers per a watched
910
region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
911
 
912
The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
913
@value{GDBN}'s application code:
914
 
915
@table @code
916
@findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
917
@item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
918
The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
919
this function.  It counts the number of debug registers required to
920
watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
921
less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
922
processors.
923
 
924
@findex i386_stopped_data_address
925
@item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
926
The target function
927
@code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
928
This
929
function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
930
Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
931
macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
932
set in DR6.
933
 
934
@findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
935
@item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
936
The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
937
is set to call this function.  The
938
argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored.  This
939
function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
940
Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
941
macro, and returns true if any bit is set.  Otherwise, false is
942
returned.
943
 
944
@findex i386_insert_watchpoint
945
@findex i386_remove_watchpoint
946
@item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
947
@itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
948
Insert or remove a watchpoint.  The macros
949
@code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
950
are set to call these functions.  @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
951
looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
952
region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
953
reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
954
register sharing between watchpoints.  If no such register is found,
955
the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
956
value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
957
register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
958
and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
959
inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
960
@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If more than one debug register is
961
required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
962
each debug register.
963
 
964
@code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
965
in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
966
length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
967
values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
968
@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If a register is shared by several
969
watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
970
decrements the reference count, and only calls
971
@code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
972
the count goes to zero.
973
 
974
@findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
975
@findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
976
@item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
977
@itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
978
These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints.  The
979
macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
980
@code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
981
The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
982
the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
983
These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
984
@code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
985
the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
986
hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
987
register.
988
 
989
@findex i386_cleanup_dregs
990
@item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
991
This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
992
bits in the mirror images of the debug registers.  It doesn't affect
993
the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
994
@end table
995
 
996
@noindent
997
@strong{Notes:}
998
@enumerate 1
999
@item
1000
x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
1001
However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
1002
@code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
1003
watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
1004
on x86.
1005
 
1006
@item
1007
x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
1008
only, or globally, for all the tasks.  For each debug register,
1009
there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
1010
whether the associated address is watched locally or globally.  The
1011
current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
1012
always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
1013
watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
1014
unavailable in many platforms.
1015
@end enumerate
1016
 
1017
@section Checkpoints
1018
@cindex checkpoints
1019
@cindex restart
1020
In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
1021
the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
1022
 
1023
Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
1024
whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
1025
state at a later time.  This can be expected to include the state of
1026
registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
1027
of open files and devices.
1028
 
1029
There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
1030
in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
1031
method implemented on the target side.
1032
 
1033
A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
1034
state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
1035
not typically include information about external entities such as
1036
open files.  Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
1037
 
1038
A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
1039
as well as some subset of external (kernel) state.  This method
1040
is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
1041
be used on other systems.
1042
 
1043
Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
1044
method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
1045
advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
1046
details of how it is done.
1047
 
1048
 
1049
@section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
1050
@cindex observer pattern interface
1051
@cindex notifications about changes in internals
1052
 
1053
In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
1054
some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals.  Traditionally, these
1055
modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
1056
hooks and gdb-events.  Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
1057
versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
1058
@value{GDBN}.  The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
1059
a strong limitation.
1060
 
1061
A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1062
Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented.  The goal was to provide
1063
a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1064
previously available.  This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1065
easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1066
interface when adding new notifications.
1067
 
1068
See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1069
currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1070
implementation is also briefly discussed.
1071
 
1072
@node User Interface
1073
 
1074
@chapter User Interface
1075
 
1076
@value{GDBN} has several user interfaces, of which the traditional
1077
command-line interface is perhaps the most familiar.
1078
 
1079
@section Command Interpreter
1080
 
1081
@cindex command interpreter
1082
@cindex CLI
1083
The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple.  It is designed to
1084
allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1085
has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1086
a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1087
 
1088
For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1089
@code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1090
to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1091
 
1092
@findex add_cmd
1093
@findex add_com
1094
To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}.  @code{add_com} adds to
1095
the main command list, and should be used for those commands.  The usual
1096
place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1097
the ends of most source files.
1098
 
1099
@findex add_setshow_cmd
1100
@findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1101
To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1102
@code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}.  The former is
1103
a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1104
further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1105
the new command structures for manipulation.
1106
 
1107
@cindex deprecating commands
1108
@findex deprecate_cmd
1109
Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1110
deprecate them for some time.  Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1111
aliases to set the deprecated flag.  @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1112
@code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument.  You can use the
1113
return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1114
command immediately after it is created.
1115
 
1116
The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1117
replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1118
@code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1119
entire string the user should type at the command line.
1120
 
1121
@anchor{UI-Independent Output}
1122
@section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1123
@c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1124
@c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1125
 
1126
@cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1127
The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1128
@value{GDBN} output code.  They hide the specifics of different user
1129
interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1130
from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1131
every UI, to produce output.
1132
 
1133
@subsection Overview and Terminology
1134
 
1135
In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1136
of output, and can even generate an input request.
1137
 
1138
Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1139
 
1140
@itemize @bullet
1141
@item
1142
to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1143
 
1144
@item
1145
to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1146
operation;
1147
 
1148
@item
1149
to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1150
progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1151
 
1152
@item
1153
to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1154
 
1155
@item
1156
to show @emph{debug data};
1157
 
1158
@item
1159
to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1160
@end itemize
1161
 
1162
@noindent
1163
This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1164
although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1165
 
1166
Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1167
involves one or more of the following:
1168
 
1169
@itemize @bullet
1170
@item
1171
output of the actual data
1172
 
1173
@item
1174
formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1175
easily readable by humans
1176
 
1177
@item
1178
machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1179
parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1180
 
1181
@item
1182
annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1183
parts in the output
1184
@end itemize
1185
 
1186
The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1187
Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines.  Note that use
1188
of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1189
deprecated.
1190
 
1191
Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1192
a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1193
non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1194
header and a body.  In a BNF-like form:
1195
 
1196
@table @code
1197
@item <table> @expansion{}
1198
@code{<header> <body>}
1199
@item <header> @expansion{}
1200
@code{@{ <column> @}}
1201
@item <column> @expansion{}
1202
@code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1203
@item <body> @expansion{}
1204
@code{@{<row>@}}
1205
@end table
1206
 
1207
 
1208
@subsection General Conventions
1209
 
1210
Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1211
@code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1212
object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1213
 
1214
The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1215
to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1216
 
1217
The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1218
When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1219
sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1220
format.
1221
 
1222
When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1223
call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1224
 
1225
 
1226
@subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1227
 
1228
@cindex list output functions
1229
@cindex table output functions
1230
@cindex tuple output functions
1231
This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1232
tuples and tables.  The routines to output the actual data items
1233
(fields) are presented in the next section.
1234
 
1235
To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1236
containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1237
fields where each field describes an identical object.
1238
 
1239
Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1240
rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading.  Use this
1241
even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1242
 
1243
@cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1244
Tables can not be nested.  Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1245
maximum of five levels.
1246
 
1247
The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1248
 
1249
@smallexample
1250
  ui_out_table_begin
1251
    ui_out_table_header
1252
    @dots{}
1253
    ui_out_table_body
1254
      ui_out_tuple_begin
1255
        ui_out_field_*
1256
        @dots{}
1257
      ui_out_tuple_end
1258
      @dots{}
1259
  ui_out_table_end
1260
@end smallexample
1261
 
1262
Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1263
functions:
1264
 
1265
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1266
The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1267
of a table.  It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1268
function for a given table.  @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1269
the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1270
@var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table.  The string
1271
pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1272
@code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1273
was @code{malloc}ed.
1274
 
1275
The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1276
the end of the table's output.
1277
@end deftypefun
1278
 
1279
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1280
@code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1281
table column.  You call this function several times, one each for every
1282
column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1283
@code{ui_out_table_body}.
1284
 
1285
The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters.  The
1286
value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1287
@code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1288
center, or right-justify it.  @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1289
specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1290
column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1291
call.
1292
@end deftypefun
1293
 
1294
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1295
This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1296
@end deftypefun
1297
 
1298
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1299
This function signals the end of a table's output.  It should be called
1300
after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1301
functions.
1302
 
1303
There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1304
call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1305
will signal an internal error.
1306
@end deftypefun
1307
 
1308
The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1309
call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1310
@code{ui_out_table_end}.  You build a tuple by calling
1311
@code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1312
calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1313
 
1314
@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1315
This function marks the beginning of a tuple output.  @var{id} points
1316
to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1317
implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1318
after the call.
1319
@end deftypefun
1320
 
1321
@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1322
This function signals an end of a tuple output.  There should be exactly
1323
one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1324
@code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1325
be signaled.
1326
@end deftypefun
1327
 
1328
@deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1329
This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1330
(@pxref{Coding, Cleanups}) to close the tuple.  It provides a convenient
1331
and correct implementation of the non-portable@footnote{The function
1332
cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1333
@smallexample
1334
struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1335
ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1336
old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1337
                            uiout);
1338
@end smallexample
1339
@end deftypefun
1340
 
1341
@deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1342
This function marks the beginning of a list output.  @var{id} points to
1343
an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1344
implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1345
after the call.
1346
@end deftypefun
1347
 
1348
@deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1349
This function signals an end of a list output.  There should be exactly
1350
one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1351
@code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1352
be signaled.
1353
@end deftypefun
1354
 
1355
@deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1356
Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1357
opens a list and then establishes cleanup (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups})
1358
that will close the list.
1359
@end deftypefun
1360
 
1361
@subsection Item Output Functions
1362
 
1363
@cindex item output functions
1364
@cindex field output functions
1365
@cindex data output
1366
The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1367
items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1368
 
1369
Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1370
 
1371
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1372
This is the most general output function.  It produces the
1373
representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1374
according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1375
@code{printf}-like format string.  The optional argument @var{fldname}
1376
supplies the name of the field.  The data items themselves are
1377
supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1378
 
1379
This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1380
use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1381
@end deftypefun
1382
 
1383
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1384
This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It uses the
1385
@code{"%d"} output conversion specification.  @var{fldname} specifies
1386
the name of the field.
1387
@end deftypefun
1388
 
1389
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1390
This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It differs from
1391
@code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1392
@var{fldname} specifies
1393
the name of the field.
1394
@end deftypefun
1395
 
1396
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1397
This function outputs an address as appropriate for @var{gdbarch}.
1398
@end deftypefun
1399
 
1400
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1401
This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1402
specification.
1403
@end deftypefun
1404
 
1405
Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1406
functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1407
@code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}.  These functions accept an argument of
1408
the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1409
used to store the data stream used for the output.  When you use one
1410
of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1411
@code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions.  To this end,
1412
you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1413
@code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1414
@code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1415
and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1416
constructed.  When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1417
you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1418
@code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1419
 
1420
@deftypefun {struct ui_stream *} ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1421
This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1422
same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1423
passed in @var{uiout}.  It returns a pointer to the newly created
1424
@code{ui_stream} object.
1425
@end deftypefun
1426
 
1427
@deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1428
This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1429
@var{streambuf}.
1430
@end deftypefun
1431
 
1432
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1433
This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1434
@code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1435
@code{ui_out_field_string} does.  After a call to
1436
@code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1437
the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1438
@end deftypefun
1439
 
1440
@strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1441
out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1442
@code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1443
cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources.  Here's a
1444
skeleton code to do that:
1445
 
1446
@smallexample
1447
 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1448
 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1449
 ...
1450
 do_cleanups (old);
1451
@end smallexample
1452
 
1453
If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1454
of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1455
 
1456
@smallexample
1457
  mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1458
  make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1459
@end smallexample
1460
 
1461
Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1462
@code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1463
same buffer twice.
1464
 
1465
@subsection Utility Output Functions
1466
 
1467
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1468
This function skips a field in a table.  Use it if you have to leave
1469
an empty field without disrupting the table alignment.  The argument
1470
@var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1471
@end deftypefun
1472
 
1473
@deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1474
This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1475
easy to be read by humans.  For example, the console implementation of
1476
this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1477
from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1478
 
1479
Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1480
the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1481
to the table's format.  Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1482
string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1483
output short messages.
1484
@end deftypefun
1485
 
1486
@deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1487
This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces.  It is handy to align the
1488
text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1489
list.
1490
@end deftypefun
1491
 
1492
@deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1493
This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1494
verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}.  The
1495
current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1496
verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1497
setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1498
as zero.  So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1499
argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1500
@end deftypefun
1501
 
1502
@deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1503
This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1504
of where to break lines which are too long.  Ignored for all other
1505
output consumers.  @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1506
be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1507
accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1508
explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions.  If
1509
@var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1510
@end deftypefun
1511
 
1512
@deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1513
This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1514
the UI buffers output.
1515
@end deftypefun
1516
 
1517
 
1518
@subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1519
 
1520
@cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1521
@cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1522
This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1523
functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1524
@value{GDBN}.  The examples all come from functions defined on the
1525
@file{breakpoints.c} file.
1526
 
1527
This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1528
produce a table.
1529
 
1530
The original code was:
1531
 
1532
@smallexample
1533
 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1534
   @{
1535
     annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1536
 
1537
     annotate_field (0);
1538
     printf_filtered ("Num ");
1539
     annotate_field (1);
1540
     printf_filtered ("Type           ");
1541
     annotate_field (2);
1542
     printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1543
     annotate_field (3);
1544
     printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1545
     if (addressprint)
1546
       @{
1547
         annotate_field (4);
1548
         printf_filtered ("Address    ");
1549
       @}
1550
     annotate_field (5);
1551
     printf_filtered ("What\n");
1552
 
1553
     annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1554
   @}
1555
@end smallexample
1556
 
1557
Here's the new version:
1558
 
1559
@smallexample
1560
  nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1561
 
1562
  if (addressprint)
1563
    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1564
  else
1565
    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1566
 
1567
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1568
    annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1569
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1570
    annotate_field (0);
1571
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num");             /* 1 */
1572
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1573
    annotate_field (1);
1574
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type");             /* 2 */
1575
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1576
    annotate_field (2);
1577
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp");              /* 3 */
1578
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1579
    annotate_field (3);
1580
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb");    /* 4 */
1581
  if (addressprint)
1582
    @{
1583
     if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1584
       annotate_field (4);
1585
     if (print_address_bits <= 32)
1586
       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1587
     else
1588
       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1589
    @}
1590
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1591
    annotate_field (5);
1592
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What");  /* 6 */
1593
  ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1594
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1595
    annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1596
@end smallexample
1597
 
1598
This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1599
to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1600
in the above example.  The original code was:
1601
 
1602
@smallexample
1603
   annotate_record ();
1604
   annotate_field (0);
1605
   printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1606
   annotate_field (1);
1607
   if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1608
       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1609
     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1610
                     (int)b->type);
1611
   printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1612
   annotate_field (2);
1613
   printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1614
   annotate_field (3);
1615
   printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1616
   @dots{}
1617
@end smallexample
1618
 
1619
This is the new version:
1620
 
1621
@smallexample
1622
   annotate_record ();
1623
   ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1624
   annotate_field (0);
1625
   ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1626
   annotate_field (1);
1627
   if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1628
       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1629
     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1630
                     (int) b->type);
1631
   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1632
   annotate_field (2);
1633
   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1634
   annotate_field (3);
1635
   ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1636
   @dots{}
1637
@end smallexample
1638
 
1639
This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1640
produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1641
functions which requires a stream to be passed.  It also shows how to
1642
automate stream destruction with cleanups.  The original code was:
1643
 
1644
@smallexample
1645
    annotate_field (5);
1646
    print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1647
@end smallexample
1648
 
1649
The new version is:
1650
 
1651
@smallexample
1652
  struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1653
  struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1654
  ...
1655
  annotate_field (5);
1656
  print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1657
  ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1658
@end smallexample
1659
 
1660
This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1661
@code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original code
1662
was:
1663
 
1664
@smallexample
1665
  annotate_field (5);
1666
  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1667
    printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1668
  else
1669
    printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1670
@end smallexample
1671
 
1672
It became:
1673
 
1674
@smallexample
1675
  annotate_field (5);
1676
  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1677
    @{
1678
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1679
      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1680
    @}
1681
  else
1682
    @{
1683
      ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1684
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1685
      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1686
    @}
1687
@end smallexample
1688
 
1689
The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1690
use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}.  The original
1691
code was:
1692
 
1693
@smallexample
1694
  annotate_field (5);
1695
  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1696
    printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1697
@end smallexample
1698
 
1699
It became:
1700
 
1701
@smallexample
1702
  annotate_field (5);
1703
  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1704
    @{
1705
      ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1706
      ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1707
      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1708
    @}
1709
@end smallexample
1710
 
1711
Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original
1712
code was:
1713
 
1714
@smallexample
1715
  annotate_field (5);
1716
  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1717
    printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1718
@end smallexample
1719
 
1720
It became:
1721
 
1722
@smallexample
1723
  annotate_field (5);
1724
  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1725
    @{
1726
      ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1727
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1728
      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1729
    @}
1730
@end smallexample
1731
 
1732
Finally, here's an example of printing an address.  The original code:
1733
 
1734
@smallexample
1735
  annotate_field (4);
1736
  printf_filtered ("%s ",
1737
        hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1738
@end smallexample
1739
 
1740
It became:
1741
 
1742
@smallexample
1743
  annotate_field (4);
1744
  ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1745
@end smallexample
1746
 
1747
 
1748
@section Console Printing
1749
 
1750
@section TUI
1751
 
1752
@node libgdb
1753
 
1754
@chapter libgdb
1755
 
1756
@section libgdb 1.0
1757
@cindex @code{libgdb}
1758
@code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago.  The theory was
1759
to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1760
 
1761
@section libgdb 2.0
1762
@cindex @code{libgdb}
1763
@code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1764
better able to support graphical and other environments.
1765
 
1766
Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1767
evolving.  The following components have so far been identified:
1768
 
1769
@itemize @bullet
1770
@item
1771
Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1772
@item
1773
Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1774
@item
1775
Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1776
@item
1777
Library - @file{gdb.h}
1778
@end itemize
1779
 
1780
The model that ties these components together is described below.
1781
 
1782
@section The @code{libgdb} Model
1783
 
1784
A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1785
 
1786
@itemize @bullet
1787
@item
1788
As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1789
@code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1790
state, etc).
1791
@item
1792
As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1793
obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1794
@end itemize
1795
 
1796
Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1797
the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1798
controlling @code{libgdb}.  In particular, a client must ensure that
1799
@code{libgdb} is idle (i.e.@: no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1800
before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1801
 
1802
@section CLI support
1803
 
1804
At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1805
@code{libgdb}.  Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1806
their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1807
requirements.
1808
 
1809
It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1810
(alternate between CLI and client query modes).  The notes below sketch
1811
out the theory:
1812
 
1813
@itemize @bullet
1814
@item
1815
The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1816
@item
1817
The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1818
versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1819
@code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1820
@item
1821
The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1822
used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1823
@end itemize
1824
 
1825
When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1826
along.  Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1827
the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1828
through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1829
At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1830
virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1831
 
1832
The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1833
@code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1834
client's custom builder).
1835
 
1836
@section @code{libgdb} components
1837
 
1838
@subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1839
@file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1840
be used to implement an observer.  At present it only allows for one
1841
observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1842
the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1843
finished the current command.
1844
 
1845
@subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1846
@file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1847
create a builder.  That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1848
when doing any queries.
1849
 
1850
@subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1851
@c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1852
@file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1853
loop.  A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1854
implement a new event-loop that @value{GDBN} would use.
1855
 
1856
The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant.  This is so that
1857
@value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1858
instead of returning.
1859
 
1860
@subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1861
@file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system.  It provides
1862
the query interface.  Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1863
builder.  The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1864
before the query function returns.
1865
 
1866
@node Values
1867
@chapter Values
1868
@section Values
1869
 
1870
@cindex values
1871
@cindex @code{value} structure
1872
@value{GDBN} uses @code{struct value}, or @dfn{values}, as an internal
1873
abstraction for the representation of a variety of inferior objects
1874
and @value{GDBN} convenience objects.
1875
 
1876
Values have an associated @code{struct type}, that describes a virtual
1877
view of the raw data or object stored in or accessed through the
1878
value.
1879
 
1880
A value is in addition discriminated by its lvalue-ness, given its
1881
@code{enum lval_type} enumeration type:
1882
 
1883
@cindex @code{lval_type} enumeration, for values.
1884
@table @code
1885
@item @code{not_lval}
1886
This value is not an lval.  It can't be assigned to.
1887
 
1888
@item @code{lval_memory}
1889
This value represents an object in memory.
1890
 
1891
@item @code{lval_register}
1892
This value represents an object that lives in a register.
1893
 
1894
@item @code{lval_internalvar}
1895
Represents the value of an internal variable.
1896
 
1897
@item @code{lval_internalvar_component}
1898
Represents part of a @value{GDBN} internal variable.  E.g., a
1899
structure field.
1900
 
1901
@cindex computed values
1902
@item @code{lval_computed}
1903
These are ``computed'' values.  They allow creating specialized value
1904
objects for specific purposes, all abstracted away from the core value
1905
support code.  The creator of such a value writes specialized
1906
functions to handle the reading and writing to/from the value's
1907
backend data, and optionally, a ``copy operator'' and a
1908
``destructor''.
1909
 
1910
Pointers to these functions are stored in a @code{struct lval_funcs}
1911
instance (declared in @file{value.h}), and passed to the
1912
@code{allocate_computed_value} function, as in the example below.
1913
 
1914
@smallexample
1915
static void
1916
nil_value_read (struct value *v)
1917
@{
1918
  /* This callback reads data from some backend, and stores it in V.
1919
     In this case, we always read null data.  You'll want to fill in
1920
     something more interesting.  */
1921
 
1922
  memset (value_contents_all_raw (v),
1923
          value_offset (v),
1924
          TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (v)));
1925
@}
1926
 
1927
static void
1928
nil_value_write (struct value *v, struct value *fromval)
1929
@{
1930
  /* Takes the data from FROMVAL and stores it in the backend of V.  */
1931
 
1932
  to_oblivion (value_contents_all_raw (fromval),
1933
               value_offset (v),
1934
               TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (fromval)));
1935
@}
1936
 
1937
static struct lval_funcs nil_value_funcs =
1938
  @{
1939
    nil_value_read,
1940
    nil_value_write
1941
  @};
1942
 
1943
struct value *
1944
make_nil_value (void)
1945
@{
1946
   struct type *type;
1947
   struct value *v;
1948
 
1949
   type = make_nils_type ();
1950
   v = allocate_computed_value (type, &nil_value_funcs, NULL);
1951
 
1952
   return v;
1953
@}
1954
@end smallexample
1955
 
1956
See the implementation of the @code{$_siginfo} convenience variable in
1957
@file{infrun.c} as a real example use of lval_computed.
1958
 
1959
@end table
1960
 
1961
@node Stack Frames
1962
@chapter Stack Frames
1963
 
1964
@cindex frame
1965
@cindex call stack frame
1966
A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
1967
and called functions.
1968
 
1969
@cindex unwind frame
1970
@value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
1971
need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind.  In fact,
1972
the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
1973
Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
1974
read the @sc{dwarf} specification, available from
1975
@url{http://www.dwarfstd.org}.
1976
 
1977
@findex frame_register_unwind
1978
@findex get_frame_register
1979
@value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
1980
``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame.  That is,
1981
@samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
1982
frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
1983
#0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame).  But then the
1984
obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
1985
frame itself?
1986
 
1987
@cindex sentinel frame
1988
@findex get_frame_type
1989
@vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
1990
To answer this question, @value{GDBN} has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
1991
``-1st'' frame.  Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
1992
the current values of the youngest real frame's registers.  If @var{f}
1993
is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) @equiv{}
1994
SENTINEL_FRAME}.
1995
 
1996
@section Selecting an Unwinder
1997
 
1998
@findex frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder
1999
@findex frame_unwind_append_unwinder
2000
The architecture registers a list of frame unwinders (@code{struct
2001
frame_unwind}), using the functions
2002
@code{frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder} and
2003
@code{frame_unwind_append_unwinder}.  Each unwinder includes a
2004
sniffer.  Whenever @value{GDBN} needs to unwind a frame (to fetch the
2005
previous frame's registers or the current frame's ID), it calls
2006
registered sniffers in order to find one which recognizes the frame.
2007
The first time a sniffer returns non-zero, the corresponding unwinder
2008
is assigned to the frame.
2009
 
2010
@section Unwinding the Frame ID
2011
@cindex frame ID
2012
 
2013
Every frame has an associated ID, of type @code{struct frame_id}.
2014
The ID includes the stack base and function start address for
2015
the frame.  The ID persists through the entire life of the frame,
2016
including while other called frames are running; it is used to
2017
locate an appropriate @code{struct frame_info} from the cache.
2018
 
2019
Every time the inferior stops, and at various other times, the frame
2020
cache is flushed.  Because of this, parts of @value{GDBN} which need
2021
to keep track of individual frames cannot use pointers to @code{struct
2022
frame_info}.  A frame ID provides a stable reference to a frame, even
2023
when the unwinder must be run again to generate a new @code{struct
2024
frame_info} for the same frame.
2025
 
2026
The frame's unwinder's @code{this_id} method is called to find the ID.
2027
Note that this is different from register unwinding, where the next
2028
frame's @code{prev_register} is called to unwind this frame's
2029
registers.
2030
 
2031
Both stack base and function address are required to identify the
2032
frame, because a recursive function has the same function address for
2033
two consecutive frames and a leaf function may have the same stack
2034
address as its caller.  On some platforms, a third address is part of
2035
the ID to further disambiguate frames---for instance, on IA-64
2036
the separate register stack address is included in the ID.
2037
 
2038
An invalid frame ID (@code{outer_frame_id}) returned from the
2039
@code{this_id} method means to stop unwinding after this frame.
2040
 
2041
@code{null_frame_id} is another invalid frame ID which should be used
2042
when there is no frame.  For instance, certain breakpoints are attached
2043
to a specific frame, and that frame is identified through its frame ID
2044
(we use this to implement the "finish" command).  Using
2045
@code{null_frame_id} as the frame ID for a given breakpoint means
2046
that the breakpoint is not specific to any frame.  The @code{this_id}
2047
method should never return @code{null_frame_id}.
2048
 
2049
@section Unwinding Registers
2050
 
2051
Each unwinder includes a @code{prev_register} method.  This method
2052
takes a frame, an associated cache pointer, and a register number.
2053
It returns a @code{struct value *} describing the requested register,
2054
as saved by this frame.  This is the value of the register that is
2055
current in this frame's caller.
2056
 
2057
The returned value must have the same type as the register.  It may
2058
have any lvalue type.  In most circumstances one of these routines
2059
will generate the appropriate value:
2060
 
2061
@table @code
2062
@item frame_unwind_got_optimized
2063
@findex frame_unwind_got_optimized
2064
This register was not saved.
2065
 
2066
@item frame_unwind_got_register
2067
@findex frame_unwind_got_register
2068
This register was copied into another register in this frame.  This
2069
is also used for unchanged registers; they are ``copied'' into the
2070
same register.
2071
 
2072
@item frame_unwind_got_memory
2073
@findex frame_unwind_got_memory
2074
This register was saved in memory.
2075
 
2076
@item frame_unwind_got_constant
2077
@findex frame_unwind_got_constant
2078
This register was not saved, but the unwinder can compute the previous
2079
value some other way.
2080
 
2081
@item frame_unwind_got_address
2082
@findex frame_unwind_got_address
2083
Same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}, except that the value is a target
2084
address.  This is frequently used for the stack pointer, which is not
2085
explicitly saved but has a known offset from this frame's stack
2086
pointer.  For architectures with a flat unified address space, this is
2087
generally the same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}.
2088
@end table
2089
 
2090
@node Symbol Handling
2091
 
2092
@chapter Symbol Handling
2093
 
2094
Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation.  Symbols include
2095
variables, functions, and types.
2096
 
2097
Symbol information for a large program can be truly massive, and
2098
reading of symbol information is one of the major performance
2099
bottlenecks in @value{GDBN}; it can take many minutes to process it
2100
all.  Studies have shown that nearly all the time spent is
2101
computational, rather than file reading.
2102
 
2103
One of the ways for @value{GDBN} to provide a good user experience is
2104
to start up quickly, taking no more than a few seconds.  It is simply
2105
not possible to process all of a program's debugging info in that
2106
time, and so we attempt to handle symbols incrementally.  For instance,
2107
we create @dfn{partial symbol tables} consisting of only selected
2108
symbols, and only expand them to full symbol tables when necessary.
2109
 
2110
@section Symbol Reading
2111
 
2112
@cindex symbol reading
2113
@cindex reading of symbols
2114
@cindex symbol files
2115
@value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}.  The usual symbol
2116
file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
2117
debugging.  @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
2118
symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
2119
more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands. In
2120
addition, it may bring in more symbols while loading shared
2121
libraries.
2122
 
2123
@findex find_sym_fns
2124
Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
2125
the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}).  BFD identifies the type
2126
of the file by examining its header.  @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
2127
this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
2128
 
2129
@findex add_symtab_fns
2130
@cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
2131
@cindex adding a symbol-reading module
2132
Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
2133
@code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization.  The argument
2134
to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
2135
name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
2136
and pointers to four functions.  These functions are called at various
2137
times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
2138
prefix.
2139
 
2140
The functions supplied by each module are:
2141
 
2142
@table @code
2143
@item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
2144
 
2145
@cindex secondary symbol file
2146
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
2147
symbol file.  This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
2148
resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
2149
read a new symbol file.  Note that the symbol file which we are reading
2150
might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
2151
whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
2152
 
2153
The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
2154
@code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
2155
new symbol file being read.  Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
2156
and can be modified as desired.  Typically, a struct of private
2157
information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
2158
in the @code{private} field.
2159
 
2160
There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
2161
@code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
2162
 
2163
@item @var{xyz}_new_init()
2164
 
2165
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
2166
This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
2167
state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
2168
@value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}.  It has no
2169
arguments and no result.  It may be called after
2170
@code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
2171
may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
2172
 
2173
@item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
2174
 
2175
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
2176
symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
2177
 
2178
@code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
2179
@code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization.  @code{addr} is
2180
the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
2181
address in memory.  @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
2182
table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
2183
or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
2184
@end table
2185
 
2186
In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
2187
@var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
2188
to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
2189
from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
2190
 
2191
@table @code
2192
@item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
2193
 
2194
Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
2195
the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
2196
pointer set.  The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
2197
symtab.  Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
2198
@code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
2199
zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
2200
@end table
2201
 
2202
@section Partial Symbol Tables
2203
 
2204
@value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
2205
 
2206
@itemize @bullet
2207
@cindex full symbol table
2208
@cindex symtabs
2209
@item
2210
Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}).  These contain the main
2211
information about symbols and addresses.
2212
 
2213
@cindex psymtabs
2214
@item
2215
Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}).  These contain enough
2216
information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
2217
symbol table.
2218
 
2219
@cindex minimal symbol table
2220
@cindex minsymtabs
2221
@item
2222
Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}).  These contain information
2223
gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
2224
@end itemize
2225
 
2226
@cindex partial symbol table
2227
This section describes partial symbol tables.
2228
 
2229
A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
2230
file's debugging information.  Small amounts of information are
2231
extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
2232
need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
2233
information.  The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
2234
quickly.  Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
2235
pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
2236
the user.
2237
@c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
2238
 
2239
The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
2240
visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
2241
that file.  These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
2242
types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
2243
 
2244
The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
2245
full symbol table would represent.
2246
 
2247
@cindex finding a symbol
2248
@cindex symbol lookup
2249
The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
2250
code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
2251
 
2252
@itemize @bullet
2253
@findex find_pc_function
2254
@findex find_pc_line
2255
@item
2256
By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
2257
function in this file).  The address will be noticed to be in the
2258
range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
2259
@code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
2260
@code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
2261
 
2262
@cindex lookup_symbol
2263
@item
2264
By its name
2265
(e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
2266
function).  Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
2267
psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in.  Local names will
2268
have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
2269
case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
2270
qualifier.  Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
2271
local scope, in which case the first case applies.  @code{lookup_symbol}
2272
does most of the work here.
2273
@end itemize
2274
 
2275
The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
2276
at the right moment.  Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
2277
while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it.  Since
2278
psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
2279
them anyway.  Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
2280
either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
2281
name.
2282
 
2283
It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
2284
been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
2285
in.  Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
2286
all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
2287
ranges.
2288
 
2289
The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
2290
thrown away after the symtab has been read in.  The symtab should always
2291
be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
2292
bug-free environment).  Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
2293
and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
2294
on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
2295
unless you want to do a lot more work.
2296
 
2297
@section Types
2298
 
2299
@unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2300
 
2301
@cindex fundamental types
2302
These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally.  Fundamental
2303
types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2304
into one of these.  They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2305
that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2306
knows about.
2307
 
2308
@unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2309
 
2310
@cindex type codes
2311
Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2312
of these types.  The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2313
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2314
which is a pointer to another type.  Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2315
types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2316
other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2317
or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2318
 
2319
@unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2320
 
2321
These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2322
fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2323
use for various ugly historical reasons.  We eventually want to
2324
eliminate these.  Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2325
initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2326
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2327
an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type.  The difference is that the
2328
@code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2329
only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2330
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2331
some particular objfile.
2332
 
2333
@section Object File Formats
2334
@cindex object file formats
2335
 
2336
@subsection a.out
2337
 
2338
@cindex @code{a.out} format
2339
The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix.  It
2340
consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2341
which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2342
respectively.
2343
 
2344
The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2345
place for debugging information.  (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2346
@samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!)  The only debugging
2347
format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2348
symbols with distinctive attributes.
2349
 
2350
The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2351
 
2352
@subsection COFF
2353
 
2354
@cindex COFF format
2355
The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2356
COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header.  The
2357
number of sections is limited.
2358
 
2359
The COFF specification includes support for debugging.  Although this
2360
was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited.
2361
For instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2362
included file.  GNU's COFF-using configs often use stabs-type info,
2363
encapsulated in special sections.
2364
 
2365
The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2366
 
2367
@subsection ECOFF
2368
 
2369
@cindex ECOFF format
2370
ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2371
workstations.
2372
 
2373
The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2374
 
2375
@subsection XCOFF
2376
 
2377
@cindex XCOFF format
2378
The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2379
The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2380
symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2381
@code{.debug} section (rather than the string table).  For more
2382
information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2383
 
2384
The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2385
shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2386
refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2387
relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable.  At least
2388
using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2389
been run (or the core file has been read).
2390
 
2391
@subsection PE
2392
 
2393
@cindex PE-COFF format
2394
Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2395
executables.  PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2396
 
2397
While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2398
COFF reader.
2399
 
2400
@subsection ELF
2401
 
2402
@cindex ELF format
2403
The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix.  ELF is
2404
similar to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it
2405
removes many of COFF's limitations.  Debugging info may be either stabs
2406
encapsulated in ELF sections, or more commonly these days, DWARF.
2407
 
2408
The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2409
 
2410
@subsection SOM
2411
 
2412
@cindex SOM format
2413
SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2414
SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2415
 
2416
The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2417
 
2418
@section Debugging File Formats
2419
 
2420
This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2421
are independent of the object file format.
2422
 
2423
@subsection stabs
2424
 
2425
@cindex stabs debugging info
2426
@code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2427
format.  Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2428
formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2429
 
2430
While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2431
including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2432
the real work.
2433
 
2434
@subsection COFF
2435
 
2436
@cindex COFF debugging info
2437
The basic COFF definition includes debugging information.  The level
2438
of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2439
 
2440
@subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2441
 
2442
@cindex ECOFF debugging info
2443
ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2444
 
2445
The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2446
 
2447
@c mention DWARF 1 as a formerly-supported format
2448
 
2449
@subsection DWARF 2
2450
 
2451
@cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2452
DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2453
 
2454
The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2455
 
2456
@subsection Compressed DWARF 2
2457
 
2458
@cindex Compressed DWARF 2 debugging info
2459
Compressed DWARF 2 is not technically a separate debugging format, but
2460
merely DWARF 2 debug information that has been compressed.  In this
2461
format, every object-file section holding DWARF 2 debugging
2462
information is compressed and prepended with a header.  (The section
2463
is also typically renamed, so a section called @code{.debug_info} in a
2464
DWARF 2 binary would be called @code{.zdebug_info} in a compressed
2465
DWARF 2 binary.)  The header is 12 bytes long:
2466
 
2467
@itemize @bullet
2468
@item
2469
4 bytes: the literal string ``ZLIB''
2470
@item
2471
8 bytes: the uncompressed size of the section, in big-endian byte
2472
order.
2473
@end itemize
2474
 
2475
The same reader is used for both compressed an normal DWARF 2 info.
2476
Section decompression is done in @code{zlib_decompress_section} in
2477
@file{dwarf2read.c}.
2478
 
2479
@subsection DWARF 3
2480
 
2481
@cindex DWARF 3 debugging info
2482
DWARF 3 is an improved version of DWARF 2.
2483
 
2484
@subsection SOM
2485
 
2486
@cindex SOM debugging info
2487
Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2488
 
2489
@section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2490
 
2491
@cindex adding debugging info reader
2492
If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2493
there is probably little to be done.
2494
 
2495
If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2496
BFD.  This is beyond the scope of this document.
2497
 
2498
You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2499
debugging symbols.  Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping
2500
routines from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the
2501
debugging information.  As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not
2502
depend on the BFD internal data structures.
2503
 
2504
For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2505
to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2506
platforms have different sizes and layouts.  Specialized routines that
2507
will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2508
directly.  This interface should be described in a file
2509
@file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2510
 
2511
@section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2512
 
2513
Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2514
its @code{objfile_obstack}.  This includes symbols, types,
2515
namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2516
 
2517
Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2518
released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded.  Therefore one
2519
objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2520
they could be unloaded at different times.
2521
 
2522
User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types.  Normally
2523
these types live in the associated objfile.  However, when the objfile
2524
is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2525
the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2526
 
2527
 
2528
@node Language Support
2529
 
2530
@chapter Language Support
2531
 
2532
@cindex language support
2533
@value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2534
although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2535
manually.
2536
 
2537
@value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2538
of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2539
means Fortran, etc.  It may also use a special-purpose language
2540
identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2541
 
2542
@section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2543
 
2544
@cindex adding source language
2545
To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2546
following steps:
2547
 
2548
@table @emph
2549
@item Create the expression parser.
2550
 
2551
@cindex expression parser
2552
This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}.  Routines for
2553
building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2554
@file{parse.c}.
2555
 
2556
@cindex language parser
2557
Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2558
parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2559
@strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2560
various parsers from defining the same global names:
2561
 
2562
@smallexample
2563
#define yyparse         @var{lang}_parse
2564
#define yylex           @var{lang}_lex
2565
#define yyerror         @var{lang}_error
2566
#define yylval          @var{lang}_lval
2567
#define yychar          @var{lang}_char
2568
#define yydebug         @var{lang}_debug
2569
#define yypact          @var{lang}_pact
2570
#define yyr1            @var{lang}_r1
2571
#define yyr2            @var{lang}_r2
2572
#define yydef           @var{lang}_def
2573
#define yychk           @var{lang}_chk
2574
#define yypgo           @var{lang}_pgo
2575
#define yyact           @var{lang}_act
2576
#define yyexca          @var{lang}_exca
2577
#define yyerrflag       @var{lang}_errflag
2578
#define yynerrs         @var{lang}_nerrs
2579
@end smallexample
2580
 
2581
At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2582
initialize it with the right values for your language.  Define an
2583
@code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2584
@samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2585
that your language exists.  You'll need some other supporting variables
2586
and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2587
@code{@var{lang}_language_defn}.  See the declaration of @code{struct
2588
language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2589
for more information.
2590
 
2591
@item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2592
 
2593
@cindex expression evaluation routines
2594
@findex evaluate_subexp
2595
@findex prefixify_subexp
2596
@findex length_of_subexp
2597
If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2598
add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}.  Add support
2599
code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2600
defined in the file @file{eval.c}.  Add cases
2601
for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2602
@code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}.  These compute
2603
the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2604
 
2605
@item Update some existing code
2606
 
2607
Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2608
@code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2609
 
2610
Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2611
These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2612
are language dependent.  If your language does not appear in the switch
2613
statement, an error is reported.
2614
 
2615
@vindex current_language
2616
Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2617
@code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2618
@code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2619
string.
2620
 
2621
@findex _initialize_language
2622
Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2623
language.  This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2624
dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2625
 
2626
@findex allocate_symtab
2627
Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2628
code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2629
This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2630
Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2631
file.  If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2632
information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2633
code.
2634
 
2635
@findex print_subexp
2636
@findex op_print_tab
2637
Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2638
expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}.  Also, add the
2639
printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2640
 
2641
@item Add a place of call
2642
 
2643
@findex parse_exp_1
2644
Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2645
@code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2646
 
2647
@item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2648
 
2649
Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}.  Make sure you update the macro
2650
variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2651
not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2652
distribution!
2653
@end table
2654
 
2655
 
2656
@node Host Definition
2657
 
2658
@chapter Host Definition
2659
 
2660
With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2661
definition machinery anymore.  The following information is provided,
2662
mainly, as an historical reference.
2663
 
2664
@section Adding a New Host
2665
 
2666
@cindex adding a new host
2667
@cindex host, adding
2668
@value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2669
New host-specific definitions should not be needed.  Older hosts
2670
@value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2671
below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2672
eventually disappear.
2673
 
2674
@table @file
2675
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2676
This file is a Makefile fragment that once contained both host and
2677
native configuration information (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the
2678
machine @var{xyz}.  The host configuration information is now handled
2679
by Autoconf.
2680
 
2681
Host configuration information included definitions for @code{CC},
2682
@code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2683
@code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2684
 
2685
New host-only configurations do not need this file.
2686
 
2687
@end table
2688
 
2689
(Files named @file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h} were once
2690
used to define host-specific macros, but were no longer needed and
2691
have all been removed.)
2692
 
2693
@subheading Generic Host Support Files
2694
 
2695
@cindex generic host support
2696
There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2697
various systems.
2698
 
2699
@table @file
2700
@cindex remote debugging support
2701
@cindex serial line support
2702
@item ser-unix.c
2703
This contains serial line support for Unix systems.  It is included by
2704
default on all Unix-like hosts.
2705
 
2706
@item ser-pipe.c
2707
This contains serial pipe support for Unix systems.  It is included by
2708
default on all Unix-like hosts.
2709
 
2710
@item ser-mingw.c
2711
This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under
2712
Windows using MinGW.
2713
 
2714
@item ser-go32.c
2715
This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2716
using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2717
 
2718
@cindex TCP remote support
2719
@item ser-tcp.c
2720
This contains generic TCP support using sockets.  It is included by
2721
default on all Unix-like hosts and with MinGW.
2722
@end table
2723
 
2724
@section Host Conditionals
2725
 
2726
When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2727
defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2728
attributes of the host system.  While formerly they could be set in
2729
host-specific header files, at present they can be changed only by
2730
setting @code{CFLAGS} when building, or by editing the source code.
2731
 
2732
These macros and their meanings (or if the meaning is not documented
2733
here, then one of the source files where they are used is indicated)
2734
are:
2735
 
2736
@ftable @code
2737
@item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2738
The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2739
@file{.gdbinit}).
2740
 
2741
@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2742
If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2743
of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2744
 
2745
@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2746
Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2747
the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2748
 
2749
@item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2750
@cindex DOS text files
2751
Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2752
line terminator.  This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2753
characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2754
which are ``sourced'' by gdb.  It must be possible to open files in binary
2755
mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2756
 
2757
@item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2758
@cindex prompt
2759
The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2760
 
2761
@item DEV_TTY
2762
@cindex terminal device
2763
The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2764
 
2765
@item ISATTY
2766
Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2767
 
2768
@item FOPEN_RB
2769
Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2770
 
2771
@item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2772
@cindex @code{long long} data type
2773
Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}.  This is set
2774
by the @code{configure} script.
2775
 
2776
@item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2777
Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2778
the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}.  This is set by the
2779
@code{configure} script.
2780
 
2781
@item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2782
Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2783
@code{n} in the file.  This is only used when reading source files.  It
2784
is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2785
 
2786
@item NORETURN
2787
If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as @code{volatile},
2788
that can be used in both the declaration and definition of functions to
2789
indicate that they never return.  The default is already set correctly
2790
if compiling with GCC.  This will almost never need to be defined.
2791
 
2792
@item ATTR_NORETURN
2793
If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as
2794
@code{__attribute__ ((noreturn))}, that can be used in the declarations
2795
of functions to indicate that they never return.  The default is already
2796
set correctly if compiling with GCC.  This will almost never need to be
2797
defined.
2798
 
2799
@item lint
2800
Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2801
 
2802
@item volatile
2803
Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2804
@code{/**/}.
2805
@end ftable
2806
 
2807
 
2808
@node Target Architecture Definition
2809
 
2810
@chapter Target Architecture Definition
2811
 
2812
@cindex target architecture definition
2813
@value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2814
machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2815
with them.
2816
 
2817
The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2818
@code{struct gdbarch *}.  The structure, and its methods, are generated
2819
using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2820
 
2821
@menu
2822
* OS ABI Variant Handling::
2823
* Initialize New Architecture::
2824
* Registers and Memory::
2825
* Pointers and Addresses::
2826
* Address Classes::
2827
* Register Representation::
2828
* Frame Interpretation::
2829
* Inferior Call Setup::
2830
* Adding support for debugging core files::
2831
* Defining Other Architecture Features::
2832
* Adding a New Target::
2833
@end menu
2834
 
2835
@node  OS ABI Variant Handling
2836
@section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2837
@cindex OS ABI variants
2838
 
2839
@value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2840
ABIs.  An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2841
variables in the target architecture definition.  There are two major
2842
components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2843
 
2844
A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2845
(the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2846
OS ABI of that file.  Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2847
to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2848
considered to be @dfn{specific}.  A match from a specific sniffer
2849
overrides a match from a generic sniffer.  Multiple sniffers for an
2850
architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2851
different operating systems which use the same basic file format.  The
2852
OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2853
examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2854
sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2855
 
2856
@cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2857
A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2858
selected OS ABI.  There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2859
for each BFD architecture.
2860
 
2861
The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2862
 
2863
@table @code
2864
 
2865
@findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2866
@item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2867
Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2868
 
2869
@findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2870
@item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2871
The ABI of the inferior is unknown.  The default @code{gdbarch}
2872
settings for the architecture will be used.
2873
 
2874
@findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2875
@item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2876
UNIX System V Release 4.
2877
 
2878
@findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2879
@item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2880
GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2881
 
2882
@findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2883
@item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2884
Sun Solaris.
2885
 
2886
@findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2887
@item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2888
OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2889
 
2890
@findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2891
@item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2892
GNU using the Linux kernel.
2893
 
2894
@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2895
@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2896
FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2897
 
2898
@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2899
@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2900
FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2901
 
2902
@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2903
@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2904
NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2905
 
2906
@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2907
@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2908
NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2909
 
2910
@findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2911
@item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2912
OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2913
 
2914
@findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2915
@item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2916
Windows CE.
2917
 
2918
@findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2919
@item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2920
DJGPP.
2921
 
2922
@findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2923
@item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2924
Irix.
2925
 
2926
@findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2927
@item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2928
Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2929
 
2930
@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2931
@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2932
HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2933
 
2934
@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2935
@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2936
HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2937
 
2938
@findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2939
@item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2940
QNX Neutrino.
2941
 
2942
@findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2943
@item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2944
Cygwin.
2945
 
2946
@findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2947
@item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2948
AIX.
2949
 
2950
@end table
2951
 
2952
Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2953
 
2954
@deftypefun {const char *} gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2955
Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2956
@end deftypefun
2957
 
2958
@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2959
Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2960
architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2961
@var{machine} and @var{osabi}.  In most cases, a value of zero for the
2962
machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2963
will suffice.
2964
@end deftypefun
2965
 
2966
@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2967
Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2968
BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2969
If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2970
be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2971
any architecture.
2972
@end deftypefun
2973
 
2974
@deftypefun {enum gdb_osabi} gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2975
Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2976
The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2977
be determined.
2978
@end deftypefun
2979
 
2980
@deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2981
Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2982
@code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}.  If a handler
2983
corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2984
architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2985
with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2986
@end deftypefun
2987
 
2988
@deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2989
Helper routine for ELF file sniffers.  Examine the file described by
2990
@var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2991
from the note.  This function should be called via
2992
@code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2993
@end deftypefun
2994
 
2995
@node Initialize New Architecture
2996
@section Initializing a New Architecture
2997
 
2998
@menu
2999
* How an Architecture is Represented::
3000
* Looking Up an Existing Architecture::
3001
* Creating a New Architecture::
3002
@end menu
3003
 
3004
@node How an Architecture is Represented
3005
@subsection How an Architecture is Represented
3006
@cindex architecture representation
3007
@cindex representation of architecture
3008
 
3009
Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
3010
via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} in the @code{bfd_architecture}
3011
enumeration.  The @code{gdbarch} is registered by a call to
3012
@code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from the file's
3013
@code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will be automatically
3014
called during @value{GDBN} startup.  The arguments are a @sc{bfd}
3015
architecture constant and an initialization function.
3016
 
3017
@findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
3018
@cindex @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}
3019
A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, @var{arch} is created by
3020
defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
3021
convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.  For example,
3022
in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
3023
@code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
3024
@file{or1k-tdep.c}.
3025
 
3026
@cindex @file{configure.tgt}
3027
@cindex @code{gdbarch}
3028
@findex gdbarch_register
3029
The resulting object files containing the implementation of the
3030
@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function are specified in the @value{GDBN}
3031
@file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case statement
3032
pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
3033
@code{configure} script.  The new @code{struct gdbarch} is created
3034
within the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
3035
@code{gdbarch_register}:
3036
 
3037
@smallexample
3038
void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture    @var{architecture},
3039
                       gdbarch_init_ftype      *@var{init_func},
3040
                       gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *@var{tdep_dump_func});
3041
@end smallexample
3042
 
3043
The @var{architecture} will identify the unique @sc{bfd} to be
3044
associated with this @code{gdbarch}.  The @var{init_func} funciton is
3045
called to create and return the new @code{struct gdbarch}.  The
3046
@var{tdep_dump_func} function will dump the target specific details
3047
associated with this architecture.
3048
 
3049
For example the function @code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} creates its
3050
architecture for 32-bit OpenRISC 1000 architectures by calling:
3051
 
3052
@smallexample
3053
gdbarch_register (bfd_arch_or32, or1k_gdbarch_init, or1k_dump_tdep);
3054
@end smallexample
3055
 
3056
@node Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3057
@subsection Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3058
@cindex @code{gdbarch} lookup
3059
 
3060
The initialization function has this prototype:
3061
 
3062
@smallexample
3063
static struct gdbarch *
3064
@var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
3065
                         struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
3066
@end smallexample
3067
 
3068
The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
3069
architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
3070
have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
3071
value.
3072
 
3073
The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
3074
is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not.  Then, it should
3075
search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
3076
return one if found.  Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
3077
create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
3078
 
3079
@findex gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info
3080
@cindex @code{gdbarch_info}
3081
The lookup is done using @code{gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info}.  It is
3082
passed the list of existing architectures, @var{arches}, and the
3083
@code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info}, and returns the first matching
3084
architecture it finds, or @code{NULL} if none are found.  If an
3085
architecture is found it can be returned as the result from the
3086
initialization function, otherwise a new @code{struct gdbach} will need
3087
to be created.
3088
 
3089
The struct gdbarch_info has the following components:
3090
 
3091
@smallexample
3092
struct gdbarch_info
3093
@{
3094
   const struct bfd_arch_info *bfd_arch_info;
3095
   int                         byte_order;
3096
   bfd                        *abfd;
3097
   struct gdbarch_tdep_info   *tdep_info;
3098
   enum gdb_osabi              osabi;
3099
   const struct target_desc   *target_desc;
3100
@};
3101
@end smallexample
3102
 
3103
@vindex bfd_arch_info
3104
The @code{bfd_arch_info} member holds the key details about the
3105
architecture.  The @code{byte_order} member is a value in an
3106
enumeration indicating the endianism.  The @code{abfd} member is a
3107
pointer to the full @sc{bfd}, the @code{tdep_info} member is
3108
additional custom target specific information, @code{osabi} identifies
3109
which (if any) of a number of operating specific ABIs are used by this
3110
architecture and the @code{target_desc} member is a set of name-value
3111
pairs with information about register usage in this target.
3112
 
3113
When the @code{struct gdbarch} initialization function is called, not
3114
all the fields are provided---only those which can be deduced from the
3115
@sc{bfd}.  The @code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info} is used as a
3116
look-up key with the list of existing architectures, @var{arches} to
3117
see if a suitable architecture already exists.  The @var{tdep_info},
3118
@var{osabi} and @var{target_desc} fields may be added before this
3119
lookup to refine the search.
3120
 
3121
Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
3122
architecture.  Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
3123
defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
3124
However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
3125
so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
3126
defaults from @var{arches}.
3127
 
3128
@node Creating a New Architecture
3129
@subsection Creating a New Architecture
3130
@cindex @code{struct gdbarch} creation
3131
 
3132
@findex gdbarch_alloc
3133
@cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} when allocating new @code{gdbarch}
3134
If no architecture is found, then a new architecture must be created,
3135
by calling @code{gdbarch_alloc} using the supplied @code{@w{struct
3136
gdbarch_info}} and any additional custom target specific
3137
information in a @code{struct gdbarch_tdep}.  The prototype for
3138
@code{gdbarch_alloc} is:
3139
 
3140
@smallexample
3141
struct gdbarch *gdbarch_alloc (const struct gdbarch_info *@var{info},
3142
                               struct gdbarch_tdep       *@var{tdep});
3143
@end smallexample
3144
 
3145
@cindex @code{set_gdbarch} functions
3146
@cindex @code{gdbarch} accessor functions
3147
The newly created struct gdbarch must then be populated.  Although
3148
there are default values, in most cases they are not what is
3149
required.
3150
 
3151
For each element, @var{X}, there is are a pair of corresponding accessor
3152
functions, one to set the value of that element,
3153
@code{set_gdbarch_@var{X}}, the second to either get the value of an
3154
element (if it is a variable) or to apply the element (if it is a
3155
function), @code{gdbarch_@var{X}}.  Note that both accessor functions
3156
take a pointer to the @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} as first
3157
argument.  Populating the new @code{gdbarch} should use the
3158
@code{set_gdbarch} functions.
3159
 
3160
The following sections identify the main elements that should be set
3161
in this way.  This is not the complete list, but represents the
3162
functions and elements that must commonly be specified for a new
3163
architecture.  Many of the functions and variables are described in the
3164
header file @file{gdbarch.h}.
3165
 
3166
This is the main work in defining a new architecture.  Implementing the
3167
set of functions to populate the @code{struct gdbarch}.
3168
 
3169
@cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} definition
3170
@code{struct gdbarch_tdep} is not defined within @value{GDBN}---it is up
3171
to the user to define this struct if it is needed to hold custom target
3172
information that is not covered by the standard @code{@w{struct
3173
gdbarch}}. For example with the OpenRISC 1000 architecture it is used to
3174
hold the number of matchpoints available in the target (along with other
3175
information).
3176
 
3177
If there is no additional target specific information, it can be set to
3178
@code{NULL}.
3179
 
3180
@node Registers and Memory
3181
@section Registers and Memory
3182
 
3183
@value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
3184
@value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
3185
block of memory.  Each register may have a different size.
3186
 
3187
@value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
3188
compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
3189
that they do match up accurately.  The only way to make this work is
3190
to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
3191
and to reflect that in the @code{gdbarch_register_name} and related functions.
3192
 
3193
@value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
3194
 
3195
@node Pointers and Addresses
3196
@section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
3197
@cindex pointer representation
3198
@cindex address representation
3199
@cindex word-addressed machines
3200
@cindex separate data and code address spaces
3201
@cindex spaces, separate data and code address
3202
@cindex address spaces, separate data and code
3203
@cindex code pointers, word-addressed
3204
@cindex converting between pointers and addresses
3205
@cindex D10V addresses
3206
 
3207
On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
3208
indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
3209
whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to.  On such
3210
machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
3211
However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
3212
address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
3213
identity, and allows a larger code address space.
3214
 
3215
@c D10V is gone from sources - more current example?
3216
 
3217
For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
3218
instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
3219
actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions.  However, since you can't
3220
jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
3221
full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
3222
If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
3223
then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
3224
However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
3225
low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
3226
zero---byte addresses waste two bits.  So instead of byte addresses,
3227
the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
3228
refer to code.  Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
3229
code space.
3230
 
3231
However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
3232
forms on the D10V.  The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
3233
@code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
3234
@code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
3235
 
3236
(The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
3237
affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
3238
going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
3239
 
3240
To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
3241
one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
3242
byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
3243
of an address of a particular type of data.  In the example above,
3244
@code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
3245
@code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
3246
@value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
3247
and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
3248
 
3249
Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
3250
processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly.  Thus,
3251
each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
3252
distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
3253
clean up some architecture-independent code.
3254
 
3255
Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
3256
 
3257
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
3258
Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
3259
@var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
3260
appropriate for the current architecture.  This yields an address
3261
@value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc.  Note that
3262
@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3263
inferior's.
3264
 
3265
For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3266
extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
3267
@var{buf} and returns it.  However, if the current architecture is the
3268
D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
3269
@var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
3270
 
3271
If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3272
will signal an internal error.
3273
@end deftypefun
3274
 
3275
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3276
Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
3277
pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture.  Note that
3278
@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3279
inferior's.
3280
 
3281
For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3282
stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
3283
appropriate length in @var{buf}.  However, if the current architecture
3284
is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
3285
a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
3286
 
3287
If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3288
will signal an internal error.
3289
@end deftypefun
3290
 
3291
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
3292
Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
3293
as appropriate for the current architecture.
3294
 
3295
This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
3296
For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
3297
described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
3298
@end deftypefun
3299
 
3300
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3301
Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
3302
the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
3303
This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
3304
above for @code{store_typed_address}.
3305
@end deftypefun
3306
 
3307
Here are two functions which architectures can define to indicate the
3308
relationship between pointers and addresses.  These have default
3309
definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
3310
simple unsigned byte addresses.
3311
 
3312
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3313
Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3314
appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
3315
address the pointer refers to.
3316
 
3317
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3318
C@t{++} reference type.
3319
@end deftypefun
3320
 
3321
@deftypefun void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3322
Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3323
@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3324
 
3325
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3326
C@t{++} reference type.
3327
@end deftypefun
3328
 
3329
@node Address Classes
3330
@section Address Classes
3331
@cindex address classes
3332
@cindex DW_AT_byte_size
3333
@cindex DW_AT_address_class
3334
 
3335
Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
3336
via the debug information.  For example, some programming environments
3337
define addresses of several different sizes.  If the debug information
3338
distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
3339
info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
3340
address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
3341
following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
3342
types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
3343
a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
3344
 
3345
@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3346
Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
3347
is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
3348
This function is normally called from within a symbol reader.  See
3349
@file{dwarf2read.c}.
3350
@end deftypefun
3351
 
3352
@deftypefun {char *} gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{type_flags})
3353
Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
3354
its name.
3355
@end deftypefun
3356
@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{name}, int *@var{type_flags_ptr})
3357
Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
3358
for that address class qualifier.
3359
@end deftypefun
3360
 
3361
Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
3362
the address class functions are defined by default.  Predicate
3363
functions are provided to detect when they are defined.
3364
 
3365
Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
3366
32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported.  Furthermore,
3367
suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
3368
uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
3369
of these "short" pointers.  The following functions could be defined
3370
to implement the address class functions:
3371
 
3372
@smallexample
3373
somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
3374
                                   int dwarf2_addr_class)
3375
@{
3376
  if (byte_size == 2)
3377
    return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3378
  else
3379
    return 0;
3380
@}
3381
 
3382
static char *
3383
somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
3384
@{
3385
  if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
3386
    return "short";
3387
  else
3388
    return NULL;
3389
@}
3390
 
3391
int
3392
somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
3393
                                           int *type_flags_ptr)
3394
@{
3395
  if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
3396
    @{
3397
      *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3398
      return 1;
3399
    @}
3400
  else
3401
    return 0;
3402
@}
3403
@end smallexample
3404
 
3405
The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
3406
to indicate the presence of one of these ``short'' pointers.  For
3407
example if the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is
3408
one of these short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following
3409
behavior:
3410
 
3411
@smallexample
3412
(gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
3413
type = int * @@short
3414
@end smallexample
3415
 
3416
 
3417
@node Register Representation
3418
@section Register Representation
3419
 
3420
@menu
3421
* Raw and Cooked Registers::
3422
* Register Architecture Functions & Variables::
3423
* Register Information Functions::
3424
* Register and Memory Data::
3425
* Register Caching::
3426
@end menu
3427
 
3428
@node Raw and Cooked Registers
3429
@subsection Raw and Cooked Registers
3430
@cindex raw register representation
3431
@cindex cooked register representation
3432
@cindex representations, raw and cooked registers
3433
 
3434
@value{GDBN} considers registers to be a set with members numbered
3435
linearly from 0 upwards.  The first part of that set corresponds to real
3436
physical registers, the second part to any @dfn{pseudo-registers}.
3437
Pseudo-registers have no independent physical existence, but are useful
3438
representations of information within the architecture.  For example the
3439
OpenRISC 1000 architecture has up to 32 general purpose registers, which
3440
are typically represented as 32-bit (or 64-bit) integers.  However the
3441
GPRs are also used as operands to the floating point operations, and it
3442
could be convenient to define a set of pseudo-registers, to show the
3443
GPRs represented as floating point values.
3444
 
3445
For any architecture, the implementer will decide on a mapping from
3446
hardware to @value{GDBN} register numbers.  The registers corresponding to real
3447
hardware are referred to as @dfn{raw} registers, the remaining registers are
3448
@dfn{pseudo-registers}.  The total register set (raw and pseudo) is called
3449
the @dfn{cooked} register set.
3450
 
3451
 
3452
@node Register Architecture Functions & Variables
3453
@subsection Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture
3454
@cindex @code{gdbarch} register architecture functions
3455
 
3456
These @code{struct gdbarch} functions and variables specify the number
3457
and type of registers in the architecture.
3458
 
3459
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR read_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache})
3460
@end deftypefn
3461
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void write_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{val})
3462
 
3463
Read or write the program counter.  The default value of both
3464
functions is @code{NULL} (no function available).  If the program
3465
counter is just an ordinary register, it can be specified in
3466
@code{struct gdbarch} instead (see @code{pc_regnum} below) and it will
3467
be read or written using the standard routines to access registers.  This
3468
function need only be specified if the program counter is not an
3469
ordinary register.
3470
 
3471
Any register information can be obtained using the supplied register
3472
cache, @var{regcache}.  @xref{Register Caching, , Register Caching}.
3473
 
3474
@end deftypefn
3475
 
3476
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_read (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3477
@end deftypefn
3478
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_write (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3479
 
3480
These functions should be defined if there are any pseudo-registers.
3481
The default value is @code{NULL}.  @var{regnum} is the number of the
3482
register to read or write (which will be a @dfn{cooked} register
3483
number) and @var{buf} is the buffer where the value read will be
3484
placed, or from which the value to be written will be taken.  The
3485
value in the buffer may be converted to or from a signed or unsigned
3486
integral value using one of the utility functions (@pxref{Register and
3487
Memory Data, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3488
Representations}).
3489
 
3490
The access should be for the specified architecture,
3491
@var{gdbarch}.  Any register information can be obtained using the
3492
supplied register cache, @var{regcache}.  @xref{Register Caching, ,
3493
Register Caching}.
3494
 
3495
@end deftypefn
3496
 
3497
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int sp_regnum
3498
@vindex sp_regnum
3499
@cindex stack pointer
3500
@cindex @kbd{$sp}
3501
 
3502
This specifies the register holding the stack pointer, which may be a
3503
raw or pseudo-register.  It defaults to -1 (not defined), but it is an
3504
error for it not to be defined.
3505
 
3506
The value of the stack pointer register can be accessed withing
3507
@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$sp}.
3508
 
3509
@end deftypevr
3510
 
3511
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int pc_regnum
3512
@vindex pc_regnum
3513
@cindex program counter
3514
@cindex @kbd{$pc}
3515
 
3516
This specifies the register holding the program counter, which may be a
3517
raw or pseudo-register.  It defaults to -1 (not defined).  If
3518
@code{pc_regnum} is not defined, then the functions @code{read_pc} and
3519
@code{write_pc} (see above) must be defined.
3520
 
3521
The value of the program counter (whether defined as a register, or
3522
through @code{read_pc} and @code{write_pc}) can be accessed withing
3523
@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$pc}.
3524
 
3525
@end deftypevr
3526
 
3527
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int ps_regnum
3528
@vindex ps_regnum
3529
@cindex processor status register
3530
@cindex status register
3531
@cindex @kbd{$ps}
3532
 
3533
This specifies the register holding the processor status (often called
3534
the status register), which may be a raw or pseudo-register.  It
3535
defaults to -1 (not defined).
3536
 
3537
If defined, the value of this register can be accessed withing
3538
@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$ps}.
3539
 
3540
@end deftypevr
3541
 
3542
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int fp0_regnum
3543
@vindex fp0_regnum
3544
@cindex first floating point register
3545
 
3546
This specifies the first floating point register.  It defaults to
3547
0.  @code{fp0_regnum} is not needed unless the target offers support
3548
for floating point.
3549
 
3550
@end deftypevr
3551
 
3552
@node Register Information Functions
3553
@subsection Functions Giving Register Information
3554
@cindex @code{gdbarch} register information functions
3555
 
3556
These functions return information about registers.
3557
 
3558
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {const char *} register_name (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3559
 
3560
This function should convert a register number (raw or pseudo) to a
3561
register name (as a C @code{const char *}).  This is used both to
3562
determine the name of a register for output and to work out the meaning
3563
of any register names used as input.  The function may also return
3564
@code{NULL}, to indicate that @var{regnum} is not a valid register.
3565
 
3566
For example with the OpenRISC 1000, @value{GDBN} registers 0-31 are the
3567
General Purpose Registers, register 32 is the program counter and
3568
register 33 is the supervision register (i.e.@: the processor status
3569
register), which map to the strings @code{"gpr00"} through
3570
@code{"gpr31"}, @code{"pc"} and @code{"sr"} respectively. This means
3571
that the @value{GDBN} command @kbd{print $gpr5} should print the value of
3572
the OR1K general purpose register 5@footnote{
3573
@cindex frame pointer
3574
@cindex @kbd{$fp}
3575
Historically, @value{GDBN} always had a concept of a frame pointer
3576
register, which could be accessed via the @value{GDBN} variable,
3577
@kbd{$fp}.  That concept is now deprecated, recognizing that not all
3578
architectures have a frame pointer.  However if an architecture does
3579
have a frame pointer register, and defines a register or
3580
pseudo-register with the name @code{"fp"}, then that register will be
3581
used as the value of the @kbd{$fp} variable.}.
3582
 
3583
The default value for this function is @code{NULL}, meaning
3584
undefined. It should always be defined.
3585
 
3586
The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch}.
3587
 
3588
@end deftypefn
3589
 
3590
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct type *} register_type (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3591
 
3592
Given a register number, this function identifies the type of data it
3593
may be holding, specified as a @code{struct type}.  @value{GDBN} allows
3594
creation of arbitrary types, but a number of built in types are
3595
provided (@code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_int32} etc),
3596
together with functions to derive types from these.
3597
 
3598
Typically the program counter will have a type of ``pointer to
3599
function'' (it points to code), the frame pointer and stack pointer
3600
will have types of ``pointer to void'' (they point to data on the stack)
3601
and all other integer registers will have a type of 32-bit integer or
3602
64-bit integer.
3603
 
3604
This information guides the formatting when displaying register
3605
information.  The default value is @code{NULL} meaning no information is
3606
available to guide formatting when displaying registers.
3607
 
3608
@end deftypefn
3609
 
3610
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_registers_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, int @var{regnum}, int @var{all})
3611
 
3612
Define this function to print out one or all of the registers for the
3613
@value{GDBN} @kbd{info registers} command.  The default value is the
3614
function @code{default_print_registers_info}, which uses the register
3615
type information (see @code{register_type} above) to determine how each
3616
register should be printed.  Define a custom version of this function
3617
for fuller control over how the registers are displayed.
3618
 
3619
The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch},
3620
with output to the the file specified by the User Interface
3621
Independent Output file handle, @var{file} (@pxref{UI-Independent
3622
Output, , UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out}
3623
Functions}).
3624
 
3625
The registers should show their values in the frame specified by
3626
@var{frame}.  If @var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is zero, then all
3627
the ``significant'' registers should be shown (the implementer should
3628
decide which registers are ``significant''). Otherwise only the value of
3629
the register specified by @var{regnum} should be output.  If
3630
@var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is non-zero (true), then the value of
3631
all registers should be shown.
3632
 
3633
By default @code{default_print_registers_info} prints one register per
3634
line, and if @var{all} is zero omits floating-point registers.
3635
 
3636
@end deftypefn
3637
 
3638
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_float_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3639
 
3640
Define this function to provide output about the floating point unit and
3641
registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info float} command respectively.
3642
The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3643
will be provided.
3644
 
3645
The @var{gdbarch} and @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the same
3646
meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above. The string
3647
@var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info float}
3648
command.
3649
 
3650
Define this function if the target supports floating point operations.
3651
 
3652
@end deftypefn
3653
 
3654
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_vector_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3655
 
3656
Define this function to provide output about the vector unit and
3657
registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info vector} command respectively.
3658
The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3659
will be provided.
3660
 
3661
The @var{gdbarch}, @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the
3662
same meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above.  The
3663
string @var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info
3664
vector} command.
3665
 
3666
Define this function if the target supports vector operations.
3667
 
3668
@end deftypefn
3669
 
3670
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int register_reggroup_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum}, struct reggroup *@var{group})
3671
 
3672
@value{GDBN} groups registers into different categories (general,
3673
vector, floating point etc).  This function, given a register,
3674
@var{regnum}, and group, @var{group}, returns 1 (true) if the register
3675
is in the group and 0 (false) otherwise.
3676
 
3677
The information should be for the specified architecture,
3678
@var{gdbarch}
3679
 
3680
The default value is the function @code{default_register_reggroup_p}
3681
which will do a reasonable job based on the type of the register (see
3682
the function @code{register_type} above), with groups for general
3683
purpose registers, floating point registers, vector registers and raw
3684
(i.e not pseudo) registers.
3685
 
3686
@end deftypefn
3687
 
3688
@node Register and Memory Data
3689
@subsection Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3690
@cindex register representation
3691
@cindex memory representation
3692
@cindex representations, register and memory
3693
@cindex register data formats, converting
3694
@cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3695
 
3696
Some architectures have different representations of data objects,
3697
depending whether the object is held in a register or memory.  For
3698
example:
3699
 
3700
@itemize @bullet
3701
 
3702
@item
3703
The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3704
floating-point registers.
3705
 
3706
@item
3707
The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers.  The
3708
@code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80
3709
bits when stored in a register.
3710
 
3711
@end itemize
3712
 
3713
In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3714
the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3715
the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3716
Interface.
3717
 
3718
For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3719
representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3720
However, they do occasionally differ.  An architecture may define the
3721
following @code{struct gdbarch} functions to request conversions
3722
between the register and memory representations of a data type:
3723
 
3724
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int gdbarch_convert_register_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg})
3725
 
3726
Return non-zero (true) if the representation of a data value stored in
3727
this register may be different to the representation of that same data
3728
value when stored in memory.  The default value is @code{NULL}
3729
(undefined).
3730
 
3731
If this function is defined and returns non-zero, the @code{struct
3732
gdbarch} functions @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3733
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} (see below) should be used to perform
3734
any necessary conversion.
3735
 
3736
If defined, this function should return zero for the register's native
3737
type, when no conversion is necessary.
3738
@end deftypefn
3739
 
3740
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_register_to_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3741
 
3742
Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of
3743
type @var{type}.  The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value
3744
in raw format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at
3745
@var{to}.
3746
 
3747
@quotation
3748
@emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3749
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3750
arguments in different orders.
3751
@end quotation
3752
 
3753
@code{gdbarch_register_to_value} should only be used with registers
3754
for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3755
non-zero value.
3756
 
3757
@end deftypefn
3758
 
3759
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_value_to_register (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3760
 
3761
Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3762
raw format.
3763
 
3764
@quotation
3765
@emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3766
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3767
arguments in different orders.
3768
@end quotation
3769
 
3770
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} should only be used with registers
3771
for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3772
non-zero value.
3773
 
3774
@end deftypefn
3775
 
3776
@node Register Caching
3777
@subsection Register Caching
3778
@cindex register caching
3779
 
3780
Caching of registers is used, so that the target does not need to be
3781
accessed and reanalyzed multiple times for each register in
3782
circumstances where the register value cannot have changed.
3783
 
3784
@cindex @code{struct regcache}
3785
@value{GDBN} provides @code{struct regcache}, associated with a
3786
particular @code{struct gdbarch} to hold the cached values of the raw
3787
registers.  A set of functions is provided to access both the raw
3788
registers (with @code{raw} in their name) and the full set of cooked
3789
registers (with @code{cooked} in their name).  Functions are provided
3790
to ensure the register cache is kept synchronized with the values of
3791
the actual registers in the target.
3792
 
3793
Accessing registers through the @code{struct regcache} routines will
3794
ensure that the appropriate @code{struct gdbarch} functions are called
3795
when necessary to access the underlying target architecture.  In general
3796
users should use the @dfn{cooked} functions, since these will map to the
3797
@dfn{raw} functions automatically as appropriate.
3798
 
3799
@findex regcache_cooked_read
3800
@findex regcache_cooked_write
3801
@cindex @code{gdb_byte}
3802
@findex regcache_cooked_read_signed
3803
@findex regcache_cooked_read_unsigned
3804
@findex regcache_cooked_write_signed
3805
@findex regcache_cooked_write_unsigned
3806
The two key functions are @code{regcache_cooked_read} and
3807
@code{regcache_cooked_write} which read or write a register from or to
3808
a byte buffer (type @code{gdb_byte *}).  For convenience the wrapper
3809
functions @code{regcache_cooked_read_signed},
3810
@code{regcache_cooked_read_unsigned},
3811
@code{regcache_cooked_write_signed} and
3812
@code{regcache_cooked_write_unsigned} are provided, which read or
3813
write the value using the buffer and convert to or from an integral
3814
value as appropriate.
3815
 
3816
@node Frame Interpretation
3817
@section Frame Interpretation
3818
 
3819
@menu
3820
* All About Stack Frames::
3821
* Frame Handling Terminology::
3822
* Prologue Caches::
3823
* Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames::
3824
* Functions to Access Frame Data::
3825
* Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers::
3826
@end menu
3827
 
3828
@node All About Stack Frames
3829
@subsection All About Stack Frames
3830
 
3831
@value{GDBN} needs to understand the stack on which local (automatic)
3832
variables are stored.  The area of the stack containing all the local
3833
variables for a function invocation is known as the @dfn{stack frame}
3834
for that function (or colloquially just as the @dfn{frame}).  In turn the
3835
function that called the function will have its stack frame, and so on
3836
back through the chain of functions that have been called.
3837
 
3838
Almost all architectures have one register dedicated to point to the
3839
end of the stack (the @dfn{stack pointer}).  Many have a second register
3840
which points to the start of the currently active stack frame (the
3841
@dfn{frame pointer}).  The specific arrangements for an architecture are
3842
a key part of the ABI.
3843
 
3844
A diagram helps to explain this.  Here is a simple program to compute
3845
factorials:
3846
 
3847
@smallexample
3848
#include <stdio.h>
3849
int fact (int n)
3850
@{
3851
  if (0 == n)
3852
    @{
3853
      return 1;
3854
    @}
3855
  else
3856
    @{
3857
      return n * fact (n - 1);
3858
    @}
3859
@}
3860
 
3861
main ()
3862
@{
3863
  int i;
3864
 
3865
  for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
3866
    @{
3867
      int   f = fact (i);
3868
      printf ("%d! = %d\n", i, f);
3869
    @}
3870
@}
3871
@end smallexample
3872
 
3873
Consider the state of the stack when the code reaches line 6 after the
3874
main program has called @code{fact@w{ }(3)}.  The chain of function
3875
calls will be @code{main ()}, @code{fact@w{ }(3)}, @code{fact@w{
3876
}(2)}, @code{@w{fact (1)}} and @code{fact@w{ }(0)}.
3877
 
3878
In this illustration the stack is falling (as used for example by the
3879
OpenRISC 1000 ABI).  The stack pointer (SP) is at the end of the stack
3880
(lowest address) and the frame pointer (FP) is at the highest address
3881
in the current stack frame.  The following diagram shows how the stack
3882
looks.
3883
 
3884
@center @image{stack_frame,14cm}
3885
 
3886
In each stack frame, offset 0 from the stack pointer is the frame
3887
pointer of the previous frame and offset 4 (this is illustrating a
3888
32-bit architecture) from the stack pointer is the return address.
3889
Local variables are indexed from the frame pointer, with negative
3890
indexes.  In the function @code{fact}, offset -4 from the frame
3891
pointer is the argument @var{n}.  In the @code{main} function, offset
3892
-4 from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{i} and offset -8
3893
from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{f}@footnote{This is
3894
a simplified example for illustrative purposes only.  Good optimizing
3895
compilers would not put anything on the stack for such simple
3896
functions.  Indeed they might eliminate the recursion and use of the
3897
stack entirely!}.
3898
 
3899
It is very easy to get confused when examining stacks.  @value{GDBN}
3900
has terminology it uses rigorously throughout.  The stack frame of the
3901
function currently executing, or where execution stopped is numbered
3902
zero.  In this example frame #0 is the stack frame of the call to
3903
@code{fact@w{ }(0)}.  The stack frame of its calling function
3904
(@code{fact@w{ }(1)} in this case) is numbered #1 and so on back
3905
through the chain of calls.
3906
 
3907
The main @value{GDBN} data structure describing frames is
3908
 @code{@w{struct frame_info}}.  It is not used directly, but only via
3909
its accessor functions.  @code{frame_info} includes information about
3910
the registers in the frame and a pointer to the code of the function
3911
with which the frame is associated.  The entire stack is represented as
3912
a linked list of @code{frame_info} structs.
3913
 
3914
@node Frame Handling Terminology
3915
@subsection Frame Handling Terminology
3916
 
3917
It is easy to get confused when referencing stack frames.  @value{GDBN}
3918
uses some precise terminology.
3919
 
3920
@itemize @bullet
3921
 
3922
@item
3923
@cindex THIS frame
3924
@cindex stack frame, definition of THIS frame
3925
@cindex frame, definition of THIS frame
3926
@dfn{THIS} frame is the frame currently under consideration.
3927
 
3928
@item
3929
@cindex NEXT frame
3930
@cindex stack frame, definition of NEXT frame
3931
@cindex frame, definition of NEXT frame
3932
The @dfn{NEXT} frame, also sometimes called the inner or newer frame is the
3933
frame of the function called by the function of THIS frame.
3934
 
3935
@item
3936
@cindex PREVIOUS frame
3937
@cindex stack frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3938
@cindex frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3939
The @dfn{PREVIOUS} frame, also sometimes called the outer or older frame is
3940
the frame of the function which called the function of THIS frame.
3941
 
3942
@end itemize
3943
 
3944
So in the example in the previous section (@pxref{All About Stack
3945
Frames, , All About Stack Frames}), if THIS frame is #3 (the call to
3946
@code{fact@w{ }(3)}), the NEXT frame is frame #2 (the call to
3947
@code{fact@w{ }(2)}) and the PREVIOUS frame is frame #4 (the call to
3948
@code{main@w{ }()}).
3949
 
3950
@cindex innermost frame
3951
@cindex stack frame, definition of innermost frame
3952
@cindex frame, definition of innermost frame
3953
The @dfn{innermost} frame is the frame of the current executing
3954
function, or where the program stopped, in this example, in the middle
3955
of the call to @code{@w{fact (0))}}.  It is always numbered frame #0.
3956
 
3957
@cindex base of a frame
3958
@cindex stack frame, definition of base of a frame
3959
@cindex frame, definition of base of a frame
3960
The @dfn{base} of a frame is the address immediately before the start
3961
of the NEXT frame.  For a stack which grows down in memory (a
3962
@dfn{falling} stack) this will be the lowest address and for a stack
3963
which grows up in memory (a @dfn{rising} stack) this will be the
3964
highest address in the frame.
3965
 
3966
@value{GDBN} functions to analyze the stack are typically given a
3967
pointer to the NEXT frame to determine information about THIS
3968
frame.  Information about THIS frame includes data on where the
3969
registers of the PREVIOUS frame are stored in this stack frame.  In
3970
this example the frame pointer of the PREVIOUS frame is stored at
3971
offset 0 from the stack pointer of THIS frame.
3972
 
3973
@cindex unwinding
3974
@cindex stack frame, definition of unwinding
3975
@cindex frame, definition of unwinding
3976
The process whereby a function is given a pointer to the NEXT
3977
frame to work out information about THIS frame is referred to as
3978
@dfn{unwinding}.  The @value{GDBN} functions involved in this typically
3979
include unwind in their name.
3980
 
3981
@cindex sniffing
3982
@cindex stack frame, definition of sniffing
3983
@cindex frame, definition of sniffing
3984
The process of analyzing a target to determine the information that
3985
should go in struct frame_info is called @dfn{sniffing}.  The functions
3986
that carry this out are called sniffers and typically include sniffer
3987
in their name.  More than one sniffer may be required to extract all
3988
the information for a particular frame.
3989
 
3990
@cindex sentinel frame
3991
@cindex stack frame, definition of sentinel frame
3992
@cindex frame, definition of sentinel frame
3993
Because so many functions work using the NEXT frame, there is an issue
3994
about addressing the innermost frame---it has no NEXT frame.  To solve
3995
this @value{GDBN} creates a dummy frame #-1, known as the
3996
@dfn{sentinel} frame.
3997
 
3998
@node Prologue Caches
3999
@subsection Prologue Caches
4000
 
4001
@cindex function prologue
4002
@cindex prologue of a function
4003
All the frame sniffing functions typically examine the code at the
4004
start of the corresponding function, to determine the state of
4005
registers.  The ABI will save old values and set new values of key
4006
registers at the start of each function in what is known as the
4007
function @dfn{prologue}.
4008
 
4009
@cindex prologue cache
4010
For any particular stack frame this data does not change, so all the
4011
standard unwinding functions, in addition to receiving a pointer to
4012
the NEXT frame as their first argument, receive a pointer to a
4013
@dfn{prologue cache} as their second argument.  This can be used to store
4014
values associated with a particular frame, for reuse on subsequent
4015
calls involving the same frame.
4016
 
4017
It is up to the user to define the structure used (it is a
4018
@code{void@w{ }*} pointer) and arrange allocation and deallocation of
4019
storage.  However for general use, @value{GDBN} provides
4020
@code{@w{struct trad_frame_cache}}, with a set of accessor
4021
routines.  This structure holds the stack and code address of
4022
THIS frame, the base address of the frame, a pointer to the
4023
struct @code{frame_info} for the NEXT frame and details of
4024
where the registers of the PREVIOUS frame may be found in THIS
4025
frame.
4026
 
4027
Typically the first time any sniffer function is called with NEXT
4028
frame, the prologue sniffer for THIS frame will be @code{NULL}.  The
4029
sniffer will analyze the frame, allocate a prologue cache structure
4030
and populate it.  Subsequent calls using the same NEXT frame will
4031
pass in this prologue cache, so the data can be returned with no
4032
additional analysis.
4033
 
4034
@node Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4035
@subsection Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4036
 
4037
These struct @code{gdbarch} functions and variable should be defined
4038
to provide analysis of the stack frame and allow it to be adjusted as
4039
required.
4040
 
4041
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR skip_prologue (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{pc})
4042
 
4043
The prologue of a function is the code at the beginning of the
4044
function which sets up the stack frame, saves the return address
4045
etc.  The code representing the behavior of the function starts after
4046
the prologue.
4047
 
4048
This function skips past the prologue of a function if the program
4049
counter, @var{pc}, is within the prologue of a function.  The result is
4050
the program counter immediately after the prologue.  With modern
4051
optimizing compilers, this may be a far from trivial exercise.  However
4052
the required information may be within the binary as DWARF2 debugging
4053
information, making the job much easier.
4054
 
4055
The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined).  This function should always
4056
be provided, but can take advantage of DWARF2 debugging information,
4057
if that is available.
4058
 
4059
@end deftypefn
4060
 
4061
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int inner_than (CORE_ADDR @var{lhs}, CORE_ADDR @var{rhs})
4062
@findex core_addr_lessthan
4063
@findex core_addr_greaterthan
4064
 
4065
Given two frame or stack pointers, return non-zero (true) if the first
4066
represents the @dfn{inner} stack frame and 0 (false) otherwise.  This
4067
is used to determine whether the target has a stack which grows up in
4068
memory (rising stack) or grows down in memory (falling stack).
4069
@xref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for an
4070
explanation of @dfn{inner} frames.
4071
 
4072
The default value of this function is @code{NULL} and it should always
4073
be defined.  However for almost all architectures one of the built-in
4074
functions can be used: @code{core_addr_lessthan} (for stacks growing
4075
down in memory) or @code{core_addr_greaterthan} (for stacks growing up
4076
in memory).
4077
 
4078
@end deftypefn
4079
 
4080
@anchor{frame_align}
4081
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR frame_align (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
4082
@findex align_down
4083
@findex align_up
4084
 
4085
The architecture may have constraints on how its frames are
4086
aligned.  For example the OpenRISC 1000 ABI requires stack frames to be
4087
double-word aligned, but 32-bit versions of the architecture allocate
4088
single-word values to the stack.  Thus extra padding may be needed at
4089
the end of a stack frame.
4090
 
4091
Given a proposed address for the stack pointer, this function
4092
returns a suitably aligned address (by expanding the stack frame).
4093
 
4094
The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined).  This function should be defined
4095
for any architecture where it is possible the stack could become
4096
misaligned.  The utility functions @code{align_down} (for falling
4097
stacks) and @code{align_up} (for rising stacks) will facilitate the
4098
implementation of this function.
4099
 
4100
@end deftypefn
4101
 
4102
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int frame_red_zone_size
4103
 
4104
Some ABIs reserve space beyond the end of the stack for use by leaf
4105
functions without prologue or epilogue or by exception handlers (for
4106
example the OpenRISC 1000).
4107
 
4108
This is known as a @dfn{red zone} (AMD terminology).  The @sc{amd64}
4109
(nee x86-64) ABI documentation refers to the @dfn{red zone} when
4110
describing this scratch area.
4111
 
4112
The default value is 0.  Set this field if the architecture has such a
4113
red zone.  The value must be aligned as required by the ABI (see
4114
@code{frame_align} above for an explanation of stack frame alignment).
4115
 
4116
@end deftypevr
4117
 
4118
@node Functions to Access Frame Data
4119
@subsection Functions to Access Frame Data
4120
 
4121
These functions provide access to key registers and arguments in the
4122
stack frame.
4123
 
4124
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_pc (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4125
 
4126
This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame (@pxref{All
4127
About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for how frames are
4128
represented) and returns the value of the program counter in the
4129
PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called THIS
4130
one).  This is commonly referred to as the @dfn{return address}.
4131
 
4132
The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4133
is typically no more than:
4134
 
4135
@smallexample
4136
ULONGEST pc;
4137
pc = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_PC_REGNUM);
4138
return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, pc);
4139
@end smallexample
4140
 
4141
@end deftypefn
4142
 
4143
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_sp (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4144
 
4145
This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame
4146
(@pxref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how
4147
frames are represented) and returns the value of the stack pointer in
4148
the PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called
4149
THIS one).
4150
 
4151
The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4152
is typically no more than:
4153
 
4154
@smallexample
4155
ULONGEST sp;
4156
sp = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_SP_REGNUM);
4157
return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, sp);
4158
@end smallexample
4159
 
4160
@end deftypefn
4161
 
4162
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int frame_num_args (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{this_frame})
4163
 
4164
This function is given a pointer to THIS stack frame (@pxref{All
4165
About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how frames are
4166
represented), and returns the number of arguments that are being
4167
passed, or -1 if not known.
4168
 
4169
The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined), in which case the number of
4170
arguments passed on any stack frame is always unknown.  For many
4171
architectures this will be a suitable default.
4172
 
4173
@end deftypefn
4174
 
4175
@node Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4176
@subsection Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4177
 
4178
When a program stops, @value{GDBN} needs to construct the chain of
4179
struct @code{frame_info} representing the state of the stack using
4180
appropriate @dfn{sniffers}.
4181
 
4182
Each architecture requires appropriate sniffers, but they do not form
4183
entries in @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, since more than one sniffer may
4184
be required and a sniffer may be suitable for more than one
4185
@code{@w{struct gdbarch}}.  Instead sniffers are associated with
4186
architectures using the following functions.
4187
 
4188
@itemize @bullet
4189
 
4190
@item
4191
@findex frame_unwind_append_sniffer
4192
@code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer to
4193
analyze THIS frame when given a pointer to the NEXT frame.
4194
 
4195
@item
4196
@findex frame_base_append_sniffer
4197
@code{frame_base_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer
4198
which can determine information about the base of a stack frame.
4199
 
4200
@item
4201
@findex frame_base_set_default
4202
@code{frame_base_set_default} is used to specify the default base
4203
sniffer.
4204
 
4205
@end itemize
4206
 
4207
These functions all take a reference to @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, so
4208
they are associated with a specific architecture.  They are usually
4209
called in the @code{gdbarch} initialization function, after the
4210
@code{gdbarch} struct has been set up.  Unless a default has been set, the
4211
most recently appended sniffer will be tried first.
4212
 
4213
The main frame unwinding sniffer (as set by
4214
@code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer)} returns a structure specifying
4215
a set of sniffing functions:
4216
 
4217
@cindex @code{frame_unwind}
4218
@smallexample
4219
struct frame_unwind
4220
@{
4221
   enum frame_type            type;
4222
   frame_this_id_ftype       *this_id;
4223
   frame_prev_register_ftype *prev_register;
4224
   const struct frame_data   *unwind_data;
4225
   frame_sniffer_ftype       *sniffer;
4226
   frame_prev_pc_ftype       *prev_pc;
4227
   frame_dealloc_cache_ftype *dealloc_cache;
4228
@};
4229
@end smallexample
4230
 
4231
The @code{type} field indicates the type of frame this sniffer can
4232
handle: normal, dummy (@pxref{Functions Creating Dummy Frames, ,
4233
Functions Creating Dummy Frames}), signal handler or sentinel.  Signal
4234
handlers sometimes have their own simplified stack structure for
4235
efficiency, so may need their own handlers.
4236
 
4237
The @code{unwind_data} field holds additional information which may be
4238
relevant to particular types of frame.  For example it may hold
4239
additional information for signal handler frames.
4240
 
4241
The remaining fields define functions that yield different types of
4242
information when given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame.  Not all
4243
functions need be provided.  If an entry is @code{NULL}, the next sniffer will
4244
be tried instead.
4245
 
4246
@itemize @bullet
4247
 
4248
@item
4249
@code{this_id} determines the stack pointer and function (code
4250
entry point) for THIS stack frame.
4251
 
4252
@item
4253
@code{prev_register} determines where the values of registers for
4254
the PREVIOUS stack frame are stored in THIS stack frame.
4255
 
4256
@item
4257
@code{sniffer} takes a look at THIS frame's registers to
4258
determine if this is the appropriate unwinder.
4259
 
4260
@item
4261
@code{prev_pc} determines the program counter for THIS
4262
frame.  Only needed if the program counter is not an ordinary register
4263
(@pxref{Register Architecture Functions & Variables,
4264
, Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture}).
4265
 
4266
@item
4267
@code{dealloc_cache} frees any additional memory associated with
4268
the prologue cache for this frame (@pxref{Prologue Caches, , Prologue
4269
Caches}).
4270
 
4271
@end itemize
4272
 
4273
In general it is only the @code{this_id} and @code{prev_register}
4274
fields that need be defined for custom sniffers.
4275
 
4276
The frame base sniffer is much simpler.  It is a @code{@w{struct
4277
frame_base}}, which refers to the corresponding @code{frame_unwind}
4278
struct and whose fields refer to functions yielding various addresses
4279
within the frame.
4280
 
4281
@cindex @code{frame_base}
4282
@smallexample
4283
struct frame_base
4284
@{
4285
   const struct frame_unwind *unwind;
4286
   frame_this_base_ftype     *this_base;
4287
   frame_this_locals_ftype   *this_locals;
4288
   frame_this_args_ftype     *this_args;
4289
@};
4290
@end smallexample
4291
 
4292
All the functions referred to take a pointer to the NEXT frame as
4293
argument. The function referred to by @code{this_base} returns the
4294
base address of THIS frame, the function referred to by
4295
@code{this_locals} returns the base address of local variables in THIS
4296
frame and the function referred to by @code{this_args} returns the
4297
base address of the function arguments in this frame.
4298
 
4299
As described above, the base address of a frame is the address
4300
immediately before the start of the NEXT frame.  For a falling
4301
stack, this is the lowest address in the frame and for a rising stack
4302
it is the highest address in the frame.  For most architectures the
4303
same address is also the base address for local variables and
4304
arguments, in which case the same function can be used for all three
4305
entries@footnote{It is worth noting that if it cannot be determined in any
4306
other way (for example by there being a register with the name
4307
@code{"fp"}), then the result of the @code{this_base} function will be
4308
used as the value of the frame pointer variable @kbd{$fp} in
4309
@value{GDBN}.  This is very often not correct (for example with the
4310
OpenRISC 1000, this value is the stack pointer, @kbd{$sp}).  In this
4311
case a register (raw or pseudo) with the name @code{"fp"} should be
4312
defined.  It will be used in preference as the value of @kbd{$fp}.}.
4313
 
4314
@node Inferior Call Setup
4315
@section Inferior Call Setup
4316
@cindex calls to the inferior
4317
 
4318
@menu
4319
* About Dummy Frames::
4320
* Functions Creating Dummy Frames::
4321
@end menu
4322
 
4323
@node About Dummy Frames
4324
@subsection About Dummy Frames
4325
@cindex dummy frames
4326
 
4327
@value{GDBN} can call functions in the target code (for example by
4328
using the @kbd{call} or @kbd{print} commands).  These functions may be
4329
breakpointed, and it is essential that if a function does hit a
4330
breakpoint, commands like @kbd{backtrace} work correctly.
4331
 
4332
This is achieved by making the stack look as though the function had
4333
been called from the point where @value{GDBN} had previously stopped.
4334
This requires that @value{GDBN} can set up stack frames appropriate for
4335
such function calls.
4336
 
4337
@node Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4338
@subsection Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4339
 
4340
The following functions provide the functionality to set up such
4341
@dfn{dummy} stack frames.
4342
 
4343
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_call (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct value *@var{function}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{bp_addr}, int  @var{nargs}, struct value **@var{args}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, int  @var{struct_return}, CORE_ADDR @var{struct_addr})
4344
 
4345
This function sets up a dummy stack frame for the function about to be
4346
called.  @code{push_dummy_call} is given the arguments to be passed
4347
and must copy them into registers or push them on to the stack as
4348
appropriate for the ABI.
4349
 
4350
@var{function} is a pointer to the function
4351
that will be called and @var{regcache} the register cache from which
4352
values should be obtained.  @var{bp_addr} is the address to which the
4353
function should return (which is breakpointed, so @value{GDBN} can
4354
regain control, hence the name).  @var{nargs} is the number of
4355
arguments to pass and @var{args} an array containing the argument
4356
values.  @var{struct_return} is non-zero (true) if the function returns
4357
a structure, and if so @var{struct_addr} is the address in which the
4358
structure should be returned.
4359
 
4360
 After calling this function, @value{GDBN} will pass control to the
4361
target at the address of the function, which will find the stack and
4362
registers set up just as expected.
4363
 
4364
The default value of this function is @code{NULL} (undefined).  If the
4365
function is not defined, then @value{GDBN} will not allow the user to
4366
call functions within the target being debugged.
4367
 
4368
@end deftypefn
4369
 
4370
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct frame_id} unwind_dummy_id (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4371
 
4372
This is the inverse of @code{push_dummy_call} which restores the stack
4373
pointer and program counter after a call to evaluate a function using
4374
a dummy stack frame.  The result is a @code{@w{struct frame_id}}, which
4375
contains the value of the stack pointer and program counter to be
4376
used.
4377
 
4378
The NEXT frame pointer is provided as argument,
4379
@var{next_frame}.  THIS frame is the frame of the dummy function,
4380
which can be unwound, to yield the required stack pointer and program
4381
counter from the PREVIOUS frame.
4382
 
4383
The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined).  If @code{push_dummy_call} is
4384
defined, then this function should also be defined.
4385
 
4386
@end deftypefn
4387
 
4388
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_code (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, CORE_ADDR @var{funaddr}, struct value **@var{args}, int  @var{nargs}, struct type *@var{value_type}, CORE_ADDR *@var{real_pc}, CORE_ADDR *@var{bp_addr}, struct regcache *@var{regcache})
4389
 
4390
If this function is not defined (its default value is @code{NULL}), a dummy
4391
call will use the entry point of the currently loaded code on the
4392
target as its return address.  A temporary breakpoint will be set
4393
there, so the location must be writable and have room for a
4394
breakpoint.
4395
 
4396
It is possible that this default is not suitable.  It might not be
4397
writable (in ROM possibly), or the ABI might require code to be
4398
executed on return from a call to unwind the stack before the
4399
breakpoint is encountered.
4400
 
4401
If either of these is the case, then push_dummy_code should be defined
4402
to push an instruction sequence onto the end of the stack to which the
4403
dummy call should return.
4404
 
4405
The arguments are essentially the same as those to
4406
@code{push_dummy_call}.  However the function is provided with the
4407
type of the function result, @var{value_type}, @var{bp_addr} is used
4408
to return a value (the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4409
should be inserted) and @var{real pc} is used to specify the resume
4410
address when starting the call sequence.  The function should return
4411
the updated innermost stack address.
4412
 
4413
@quotation
4414
@emph{Note:} This does require that code in the stack can be executed.
4415
Some Harvard architectures may not allow this.
4416
@end quotation
4417
 
4418
@end deftypefn
4419
 
4420
@node Adding support for debugging core files
4421
@section Adding support for debugging core files
4422
@cindex core files
4423
 
4424
The prerequisite for adding core file support in @value{GDBN} is to have
4425
core file support in BFD.
4426
 
4427
Once BFD support is available, writing the apropriate
4428
@code{regset_from_core_section} architecture function should be all
4429
that is needed in order to add support for core files in @value{GDBN}.
4430
 
4431
@node Defining Other Architecture Features
4432
@section Defining Other Architecture Features
4433
 
4434
This section describes other functions and values in @code{gdbarch},
4435
together with some useful macros, that you can use to define the
4436
target architecture.
4437
 
4438
@table @code
4439
 
4440
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4441
@findex gdbarch_addr_bits_remove
4442
If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
4443
really part of the address, then this function is used to zero those bits in
4444
@var{addr}.  This is only used for addresses of instructions, and even then not
4445
in all contexts.
4446
 
4447
For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
4448
2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
4449
instruction.  Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
4450
boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
4451
address of the instruction.  @code{gdbarch_addr_bits_remove} would then for
4452
example look like that:
4453
@smallexample
4454
arch_addr_bits_remove (CORE_ADDR addr)
4455
@{
4456
  return (addr &= ~0x3);
4457
@}
4458
@end smallexample
4459
 
4460
@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
4461
@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags
4462
If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
4463
referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
4464
and return 1.  If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
4465
return 0.
4466
 
4467
The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
4468
@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
4469
possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
4470
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4471
 
4472
@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4473
@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags_p
4474
Predicate which indicates whether @code{address_class_name_to_type_flags}
4475
has been defined.
4476
 
4477
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
4478
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags
4479
Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
4480
the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
4481
used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class.  The value
4482
returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
4483
@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
4484
values or'd together.
4485
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4486
 
4487
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4488
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p
4489
Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p} has
4490
been defined.
4491
 
4492
@item const char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type_flags})
4493
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name
4494
Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
4495
flags given by @var{type_flags}.
4496
 
4497
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p (@var{gdbarch})
4498
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p
4499
Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name} has been defined.
4500
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4501
 
4502
@item void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
4503
@findex gdbarch_address_to_pointer
4504
Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
4505
@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
4506
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
4507
C@t{++} reference type.
4508
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4509
 
4510
@item int gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion (@var{gdbarch})
4511
@findex gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion
4512
Used to notify if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
4513
parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
4514
original type, rather than the promoted type.
4515
 
4516
@item gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch})
4517
@findex gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4518
This is used if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match
4519
the endianism of the target byte order.  A value of 1 means that the bits
4520
are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
4521
 
4522
@item set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bits_big_endian})
4523
@findex set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4524
Calling set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian with a value of 1 indicates that the
4525
bits in the target are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 indicates
4526
little-endian.
4527
 
4528
@item BREAKPOINT
4529
@findex BREAKPOINT
4530
This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
4531
memory where a breakpoint is set.  Although it's common to use a trap
4532
instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
4533
pattern could be an invalid instruction.  The breakpoint must be no
4534
longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
4535
 
4536
@code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
4537
@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4538
 
4539
@item BIG_BREAKPOINT
4540
@itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4541
@findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4542
@findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
4543
Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
4544
 
4545
@code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
4546
favor of @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4547
 
4548
@item const gdb_byte *gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
4549
@findex gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc
4550
@anchor{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} Use the program counter to determine the
4551
contents and size of a breakpoint instruction.  It returns a pointer to
4552
a static string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
4553
length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
4554
counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
4555
breakpoint should be inserted.  May return @code{NULL} to indicate that
4556
software breakpoints are not supported.
4557
 
4558
Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
4559
not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
4560
instruction.  The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
4561
instruction of the architecture.
4562
 
4563
Provided breakpoint bytes can be also used by @code{bp_loc_is_permanent} to
4564
detect permanent breakpoints.  @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} should return
4565
an unchanged memory copy if it was called for a location with permanent
4566
breakpoint as some architectures use breakpoint instructions containing
4567
arbitrary parameter value.
4568
 
4569
Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
4570
 
4571
@item int gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4572
@itemx gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4573
@findex gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint
4574
@findex gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint
4575
Insert or remove memory based breakpoints.  Reasonable defaults
4576
(@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
4577
@code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
4578
provided so that it is not necessary to set these for most
4579
architectures.  Architectures which may want to set
4580
@code{gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint} and @code{gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint} will likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
4581
conventional manner.
4582
 
4583
It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
4584
custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
4585
@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} needs to read the target's memory for some
4586
reason.
4587
 
4588
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bpaddr})
4589
@findex gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address
4590
@cindex breakpoint address adjusted
4591
Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
4592
address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
4593
breakpoint placement.  This method is not needed by most targets.
4594
 
4595
The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
4596
The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
4597
instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
4598
instruction or instruction bundle.  When the processor executes
4599
one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
4600
in parallel.
4601
 
4602
In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
4603
from distinct source statements into the same bundle.  The line number
4604
information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
4605
refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle.  So,
4606
if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
4607
statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
4608
instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
4609
(Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
4610
in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
4611
at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
4612
 
4613
The FR-V's @code{gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address} method will adjust a
4614
breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
4615
the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
4616
 
4617
Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
4618
expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
4619
is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
4620
 
4621
@item int gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})
4622
@findex gdbarch_call_dummy_location
4623
See the file @file{inferior.h}.
4624
 
4625
This method has been replaced by @code{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}
4626
(@pxref{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}).
4627
 
4628
@item int gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regum})
4629
@findex gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register
4630
This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
4631
from an inferior process.
4632
 
4633
@item int gdbarch_cannot_store_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum})
4634
@findex gdbarch_cannot_store_register
4635
This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
4636
written to the target.  This is often the case for program counters,
4637
status words, and other special registers.  This function returns 0 as
4638
default so that @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
4639
 
4640
@item int gdbarch_convert_register_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type})
4641
@findex gdbarch_convert_register_p
4642
Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} represents data values of type
4643
@var{type} in a non-standard form.
4644
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4645
 
4646
@item int gdbarch_fp0_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4647
@findex gdbarch_fp0_regnum
4648
This function returns the number of the first floating point register,
4649
if the machine has such registers.  Otherwise, it returns -1.
4650
 
4651
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break (@var{gdbarch})
4652
@findex gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break
4653
This function shall return the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
4654
program encounters a breakpoint.  This is often the number of bytes in
4655
@code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always.  For most targets this value will be 0.
4656
 
4657
@item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
4658
@findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
4659
If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
4660
library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
4661
 
4662
@item int gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf2_regnr})
4663
@findex gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum
4664
Convert DWARF2 register number @var{dwarf2_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.
4665
If not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4666
 
4667
@item int gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ecoff_regnr})
4668
@findex gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum
4669
Convert ECOFF register number  @var{ecoff_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.  If
4670
not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4671
 
4672
@item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4673
@itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4674
@findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4675
@findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4676
If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
4677
look for to detect that GCC compiled the file.  The default symbols
4678
are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
4679
respectively.  (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
4680
 
4681
@item gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4682
@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4683
This function determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp}
4684
will jump to, assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp}
4685
breakpoint.  It takes a @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the
4686
target PC value through this pointer.  It examines the current state
4687
of the machine as needed, typically by using a manually-determined
4688
offset into the @code{jmp_buf}.  (While we might like to get the offset
4689
from the target's @file{jmpbuf.h}, that header file cannot be assumed
4690
to be available when building a cross-debugger.)
4691
 
4692
@item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4693
@findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4694
Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system.  This
4695
conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
4696
feature-specific macros.  It was introduced in haste and we are
4697
repenting at leisure.
4698
 
4699
@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4700
An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4701
support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4702
 
4703
@item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4704
@findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
4705
Returns non-zero if the given @var{addr} is in the epilogue of a function.
4706
The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
4707
the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
4708
final `return from function call' instruction.
4709
 
4710
@item int gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{name})
4711
@findex gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline
4712
Define this function to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4713
trampoline that returns from a shared library.
4714
 
4715
@item target_so_ops.in_dynsym_resolve_code (@var{pc})
4716
@findex in_dynsym_resolve_code
4717
Define this to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4718
dynamic linker.
4719
 
4720
@item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
4721
@findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
4722
Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
4723
should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
4724
function.  A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
4725
to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
4726
stepping will suffice.
4727
 
4728
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_integer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4729
@findex gdbarch_integer_to_address
4730
@cindex converting integers to addresses
4731
Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
4732
conversions specially.  Converts that value to an address according to
4733
the current architectures conventions.
4734
 
4735
@emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
4736
their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
4737
@code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
4738
computed by the target program.  Any deviation from this rule can cause
4739
major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully.  In
4740
other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
4741
conversions in clever and useful ways.  It has, however, been pointed
4742
out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
4743
to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
4744
disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}.  Adding an architecture
4745
method like @code{gdbarch_integer_to_address} certainly makes it possible for
4746
@value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
4747
 
4748
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
4749
Addresses}.
4750
 
4751
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4752
@findex gdbarch_pointer_to_address
4753
Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
4754
appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
4755
address the pointer refers to.
4756
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4757
 
4758
@item void gdbarch_register_to_value(@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{fur})
4759
@findex gdbarch_register_to_value
4760
Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
4761
@var{type}.
4762
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4763
 
4764
@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4765
@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
4766
Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
4767
form.
4768
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4769
 
4770
@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4771
@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
4772
Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
4773
form.
4774
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4775
 
4776
@item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
4777
@findex regset_from_core_section
4778
Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
4779
@var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
4780
 
4781
@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
4782
@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
4783
Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
4784
mechanism.  The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
4785
 
4786
@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
4787
@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
4788
A function that inserts or removes (depending on
4789
@var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
4790
the next instruction.  See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
4791
for examples.
4792
 
4793
@item set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing (@var{gdbarch}, @var{set})
4794
@findex set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing
4795
Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
4796
debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
4797
them.  So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
4798
address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
4799
linking faster.
4800
 
4801
Calling @code{set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing} with a non-zero
4802
argument @var{set} indicates that a particular set of hacks of this sort
4803
are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN} entries in stabs-format
4804
debugging information.  @code{N_SO} stabs mark the beginning and ending
4805
addresses of compilation units in the text segment.  @code{N_FUN} stabs
4806
mark the starts and ends of functions.
4807
 
4808
In this case, @value{GDBN} assumes two things:
4809
 
4810
@itemize @bullet
4811
@item
4812
@code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero.  Instead of using those
4813
addresses, you should find the address where the function starts by
4814
taking the function name from the stab, and then looking that up in the
4815
minsyms (the linker/assembler symbol table).  In other words, the stab
4816
has the name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place
4817
that carries the address.
4818
 
4819
@item
4820
@code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too.  You just look at the
4821
@code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab, and
4822
guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from them.
4823
@end itemize
4824
 
4825
@item int gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
4826
@findex gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr
4827
@anchor{gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this function to return
4828
nonzero if a function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference
4829
instead of value.
4830
 
4831
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
4832
@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_call
4833
@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
4834
the inferior function onto the stack.  In addition to pushing @var{nargs}, the
4835
code should push @var{struct_addr} (when @var{struct_return} is non-zero), and
4836
the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
4837
 
4838
@var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
4839
function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
4840
 
4841
Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
4842
 
4843
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{regcache})
4844
@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_code
4845
@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
4846
instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
4847
called function should return.
4848
 
4849
Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4850
should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
4851
the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
4852
 
4853
By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
4854
(@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
4855
reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
4856
 
4857
This method replaces @w{@code{gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4858
 
4859
@item int gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sdb_regnr})
4860
@findex gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum
4861
Use this function to convert sdb register @var{sdb_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4862
regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4863
 
4864
@item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
4865
@findex gdbarch_return_value
4866
@anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
4867
type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
4868
would use.
4869
 
4870
@value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
4871
@code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
4872
in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
4873
value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
4874
passed in as the function's first parameter.
4875
 
4876
If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
4877
non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
4878
@var{regcache}.
4879
 
4880
If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
4881
non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
4882
@var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
4883
just returned function).
4884
 
4885
@emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
4886
store methods.  By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
4887
the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place.  If
4888
@value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
4889
instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
4890
return-value extract and store.}
4891
 
4892
@emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
4893
parameter, and such a parameter should not be added.  If an architecture
4894
that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
4895
then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
4896
@var{function} should be pursued.}
4897
 
4898
@emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
4899
to the inner most frame.  While replacing @var{regcache} with a
4900
@code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
4901
limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
4902
 
4903
@item void gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
4904
@findex gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint
4905
Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint.  @value{GDBN} normally
4906
steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
4907
re-inserting the breakpoint.  However, permanent breakpoints are
4908
hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
4909
doesn't work.  Calling @code{gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint} adjusts the
4910
processor's state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint.
4911
This function does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
4912
of a branch or jump.
4913
 
4914
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{pc})
4915
@findex gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code
4916
If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
4917
the functions being called, then define this function to return a new PC
4918
that is at the start of the real function.
4919
 
4920
@item int gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4921
@findex gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum
4922
If the frame pointer is in a register, use this function to return the
4923
number of that register.
4924
 
4925
@item int gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{stab_regnr})
4926
@findex gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum
4927
Use this function to convert stab register @var{stab_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4928
regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4929
 
4930
@item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4931
@findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4932
The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable.  (Never defined in
4933
current sources.)
4934
 
4935
@item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4936
@findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4937
Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4938
 
4939
@item int gdbarch_char_signed (@var{gdbarch})
4940
@findex gdbarch_char_signed
4941
Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4942
it should be unsigned.
4943
 
4944
The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4945
equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4946
character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4947
Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4948
on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4949
 
4950
@item int gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4951
@findex gdbarch_double_bit
4952
Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @w{@code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4953
 
4954
@item int gdbarch_float_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4955
@findex gdbarch_float_bit
4956
Number of bits in a float; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4957
 
4958
@item int gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4959
@findex gdbarch_int_bit
4960
Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4961
 
4962
@item int gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4963
@findex gdbarch_long_bit
4964
Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4965
 
4966
@item int gdbarch_long_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4967
@findex gdbarch_long_double_bit
4968
Number of bits in a long double float;
4969
defaults to @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4970
 
4971
@item int gdbarch_long_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4972
@findex gdbarch_long_long_bit
4973
Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to
4974
@w{@code{2 * gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4975
 
4976
@item int gdbarch_ptr_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4977
@findex gdbarch_ptr_bit
4978
Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to
4979
@w{@code{gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4980
 
4981
@item int gdbarch_short_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4982
@findex gdbarch_short_bit
4983
Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @w{@code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4984
 
4985
@item void gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{frame_regnum}, @var{frame_offset})
4986
@findex gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer
4987
Returns a @code{(@var{register}, @var{offset})} pair representing the virtual
4988
frame pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}.  If virtual frame
4989
pointers are not used, a default definition simply returns
4990
@code{gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum} (or @code{gdbarch_sp_regnum}, if
4991
no frame pointer is defined), with an offset of zero.
4992
 
4993
@c need to explain virtual frame pointers, they are recorded in agent
4994
@c expressions for tracepoints
4995
 
4996
@item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4997
If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4998
watchpoints.  @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4999
other related macros.
5000
 
5001
@item int gdbarch_print_insn (@var{gdbarch}, @var{vma}, @var{info})
5002
@findex gdbarch_print_insn
5003
This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
5004
instruction.  It prints the instruction at address @var{vma} in
5005
debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes.
5006
This usually points to a function in the @code{opcodes} library
5007
(@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).  @var{info} is a structure (of
5008
type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in the header file
5009
@file{include/dis-asm.h}, and used to pass information to the
5010
instruction decoding routine.
5011
 
5012
@item frame_id gdbarch_dummy_id (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
5013
@findex gdbarch_dummy_id
5014
@anchor{gdbarch_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @w{@code{struct
5015
frame_id}} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
5016
frame.  The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
5017
previously saved by @code{call_function_by_hand}.
5018
 
5019
@item void gdbarch_value_to_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
5020
@findex gdbarch_value_to_register
5021
Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of a register.
5022
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
5023
 
5024
@end table
5025
 
5026
Motorola M68K target conditionals.
5027
 
5028
@ftable @code
5029
@item BPT_VECTOR
5030
Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector.  If
5031
not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
5032
 
5033
@item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
5034
Defaults to @code{1}.
5035
 
5036
@end ftable
5037
 
5038
@node Adding a New Target
5039
@section Adding a New Target
5040
 
5041
@cindex adding a target
5042
The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
5043
 
5044
@table @file
5045
@cindex target dependent files
5046
 
5047
@item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
5048
Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine.  On
5049
some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5050
 
5051
@item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
5052
@itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
5053
This is required to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
5054
processor chip (registers, stack, etc.).  It can be shared among many
5055
targets that use the same processor architecture.
5056
 
5057
@end table
5058
 
5059
(Target header files such as
5060
@file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h},
5061
@file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h}, and
5062
@file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} are no longer used.)
5063
 
5064
@findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
5065
A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, arch is created by
5066
defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
5067
convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.  For
5068
example, in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
5069
@code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
5070
@file{or1k-tdep.c}.
5071
 
5072
The object file resulting from compiling this source file, which will
5073
contain the implementation of the
5074
@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function is specified in the
5075
@value{GDBN} @file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case
5076
statement pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
5077
@kbd{configure} script.
5078
 
5079
@quotation
5080
@emph{Note:} If the architecture requires multiple source files, the
5081
corresponding binaries should be included in
5082
@file{configure.tgt}. However if there are header files, the
5083
dependencies on these will not be picked up from the entries in
5084
@file{configure.tgt}. The @file{Makefile.in} file will need extending to
5085
show these dependencies.
5086
@end quotation
5087
 
5088
@findex gdbarch_register
5089
A new struct gdbarch, defining the new architecture, is created within
5090
the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
5091
@code{gdbarch_register}:
5092
 
5093
@smallexample
5094
void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture    architecture,
5095
                       gdbarch_init_ftype      *init_func,
5096
                       gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *tdep_dump_func);
5097
@end smallexample
5098
 
5099
This function has been described fully in an earlier
5100
section.  @xref{How an Architecture is Represented, , How an
5101
Architecture is Represented}.
5102
 
5103
The new @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} should contain implementations of
5104
the necessary functions (described in the previous sections) to
5105
describe the basic layout of the target machine's processor chip
5106
(registers, stack, etc.).  It can be shared among many targets that use
5107
the same processor architecture.
5108
 
5109
@node Target Descriptions
5110
@chapter Target Descriptions
5111
@cindex target descriptions
5112
 
5113
The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
5114
contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture.  For
5115
some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
5116
instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
5117
@dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
5118
more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
5119
directly.
5120
 
5121
For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
5122
target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
5123
Debugging with @value{GDBN}}.  This section will cover some related
5124
topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
5125
 
5126
@menu
5127
* Target Descriptions Implementation::
5128
* Adding Target Described Register Support::
5129
@end menu
5130
 
5131
@node Target Descriptions Implementation
5132
@section Target Descriptions Implementation
5133
@cindex target descriptions, implementation
5134
 
5135
Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
5136
an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
5137
reverts to a default gdbarch.  Then, after connecting, it looks for a
5138
new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
5139
 
5140
A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
5141
@samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
5142
@code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector.  For instance,
5143
the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
5144
64-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
5145
 
5146
If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
5147
incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}.  Any
5148
@samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
5149
architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
5150
new architecture.  Then the initialization routine is called, and has
5151
a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
5152
of the target description.  For instance, it can recognize any
5153
properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine.  Also
5154
see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
5155
 
5156
@node Adding Target Described Register Support
5157
@section Adding Target Described Register Support
5158
@cindex target descriptions, adding register support
5159
 
5160
Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
5161
instance of the target.  But it takes a little work in the architecture
5162
specific routines to support this.
5163
 
5164
A target description must either have no registers or a complete
5165
set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
5166
with the target defined registers.  It is the architecture's
5167
responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
5168
everything it needs.  To keep architecture code simple, the same
5169
mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
5170
standard registers.
5171
 
5172
If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
5173
registers.  The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
5174
 
5175
@itemize @bullet
5176
 
5177
@item
5178
Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
5179
searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
5180
 
5181
@item
5182
Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
5183
 
5184
@item
5185
Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
5186
to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
5187
 
5188
@item
5189
Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
5190
feature is missing expected registers.  This will produce a warning that
5191
the description was incomplete.
5192
 
5193
@item
5194
Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
5195
is called.
5196
 
5197
@item
5198
Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
5199
fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
5200
 
5201
@item
5202
Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
5203
returning it.
5204
 
5205
@end itemize
5206
 
5207
After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
5208
@code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
5209
routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
5210
the target description.  @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
5211
for any additional registers in the description.
5212
 
5213
Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
5214
 
5215
@itemize @bullet
5216
 
5217
@item
5218
Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
5219
constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
5220
as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}.  But because
5221
pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
5222
which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
5223
can not be used for pseudos.  They must be numbered relative to
5224
@code{num_regs} instead.
5225
 
5226
@item
5227
The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
5228
architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
5229
@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
5230
@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
5231
describing pseudo registers.  These routines will be passed
5232
internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
5233
gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
5234
 
5235
@end itemize
5236
 
5237
 
5238
@node Target Vector Definition
5239
 
5240
@chapter Target Vector Definition
5241
@cindex target vector
5242
 
5243
The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
5244
abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
5245
actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
5246
@value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
5247
each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
5248
 
5249
@menu
5250
* Managing Execution State::
5251
* Existing Targets::
5252
@end menu
5253
 
5254
@node Managing Execution State
5255
@section Managing Execution State
5256
@cindex execution state
5257
 
5258
A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
5259
stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
5260
manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
5261
inferior).  Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
5262
active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
5263
when the target has exited or not yet started.
5264
 
5265
For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
5266
not create a running program.  Neither registers nor memory are
5267
accessible until @code{run}.  Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
5268
program can not continue executing.  But in both cases @value{GDBN}
5269
remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
5270
are directed to the simulator.
5271
 
5272
A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
5273
onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
5274
@code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
5275
@code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
5276
 
5277
A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
5278
still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
5279
@code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}.  Instead, it should
5280
call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
5281
in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
5282
after connection.  It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
5283
time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
5284
@code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
5285
@code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
5286
@code{to_mourn_inferior}).  The target should also make sure to call
5287
@code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
5288
target to inactive state.
5289
 
5290
@node Existing Targets
5291
@section Existing Targets
5292
@cindex targets
5293
 
5294
@subsection File Targets
5295
 
5296
Both executables and core files have target vectors.
5297
 
5298
@subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
5299
 
5300
@value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code that
5301
runs in the target system.  @value{GDBN} provides several sample
5302
@dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
5303
systems for this purpose; they are named @file{@var{cpu}-stub.c}.  Many
5304
operating systems, embedded targets, emulators, and simulators already
5305
have a @value{GDBN} stub built into them, and maintenance of the remote
5306
protocol must be careful to preserve compatibility.
5307
 
5308
The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
5309
your target code.  What follows is a discussion of integrating the
5310
SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
5311
program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
5312
 
5313
The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
5314
@code{trap_low}:
5315
 
5316
@enumerate
5317
@item
5318
%l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
5319
 
5320
@item
5321
traps are disabled;
5322
 
5323
@item
5324
you are in the correct trap window.
5325
@end enumerate
5326
 
5327
As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
5328
is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
5329
The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
5330
hardware trap vector.  That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
5331
which is provided by the external environment.  For instance, this could
5332
set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
5333
first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
5334
 
5335
For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
5336
``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
5337
and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions.  Anyway, this is all
5338
controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify.  The most important
5339
trap for us is for @code{ta 1}.  Without that, we can't single step or
5340
do breakpoints.  Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
5341
of the debugger/stub.
5342
 
5343
From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
5344
They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
5345
 
5346
@subsection ROM Monitor Interface
5347
 
5348
@subsection Custom Protocols
5349
 
5350
@subsection Transport Layer
5351
 
5352
@subsection Builtin Simulator
5353
 
5354
 
5355
@node Native Debugging
5356
 
5357
@chapter Native Debugging
5358
@cindex native debugging
5359
 
5360
Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
5361
 
5362
@table @file
5363
@vindex NATDEPFILES
5364
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
5365
Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
5366
machine @var{xyz}.  In particular, this lists the required
5367
native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
5368
Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
5369
@var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}.  You can also
5370
define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
5371
@samp{NAT_CDEPS}, @samp{NAT_GENERATED_FILES}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
5372
 
5373
@emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
5374
originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
5375
on machine @var{xyz}.  While the file is no longer used for this
5376
purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains.  Perhaps someone will
5377
eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
5378
suffix.}
5379
 
5380
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
5381
(@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}).  Contains C
5382
macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
5383
child process control and core file support.
5384
 
5385
@item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
5386
Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
5387
this machine.  On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5388
@end table
5389
 
5390
There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
5391
various systems.  These can be customized in various ways by macros
5392
defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file.  If these routines work for
5393
the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
5394
@samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5395
 
5396
Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
5397
to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
5398
Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
5399
into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5400
 
5401
@table @file
5402
@item inftarg.c
5403
This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5404
processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
5405
 
5406
@item procfs.c
5407
This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5408
processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
5409
 
5410
@item fork-child.c
5411
This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
5412
and exec'' to start up a child process.
5413
 
5414
@item infptrace.c
5415
This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
5416
the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
5417
@end table
5418
 
5419
@section ptrace
5420
 
5421
@section /proc
5422
 
5423
@section win32
5424
 
5425
@section shared libraries
5426
 
5427
@section Native Conditionals
5428
@cindex native conditionals
5429
 
5430
When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
5431
defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
5432
target systems are the same.  These macros should be defined (or left
5433
undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
5434
 
5435
@table @code
5436
 
5437
@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
5438
An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
5439
support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
5440
 
5441
@item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
5442
@findex SOLIB_ADD
5443
Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
5444
@var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table.  If
5445
@var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
5446
processing for @var{filename} is still done.
5447
 
5448
@item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5449
@findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5450
Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
5451
want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
5452
 
5453
@item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5454
@findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5455
When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
5456
twice; once when
5457
the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs.  If the actual
5458
number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
5459
expand into the number expected.
5460
 
5461
@end table
5462
 
5463
@node Support Libraries
5464
 
5465
@chapter Support Libraries
5466
 
5467
@section BFD
5468
@cindex BFD library
5469
 
5470
BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
5471
 
5472
@table @emph
5473
@item identifying executable and core files
5474
BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
5475
several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
5476
 
5477
@item access to sections of files
5478
BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
5479
sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
5480
(such as the text section or the data section).  @value{GDBN} simply
5481
calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
5482
length @var{z}.
5483
 
5484
@item specialized core file support
5485
BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
5486
core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
5487
file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
5488
file.
5489
 
5490
@item locating the symbol information
5491
@value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
5492
symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file.  @value{GDBN} itself
5493
handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
5494
symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
5495
string table, etc.
5496
@end table
5497
 
5498
@section opcodes
5499
@cindex opcodes library
5500
 
5501
The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler.  (It's a separate
5502
library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
5503
 
5504
@section readline
5505
@cindex readline library
5506
The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
5507
that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
5508
 
5509
@section libiberty
5510
@cindex @code{libiberty} library
5511
 
5512
The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
5513
that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
5514
systems.  Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
5515
groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
5516
environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
5517
a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
5518
functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
5519
beyond standard functions).
5520
 
5521
@value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
5522
library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
5523
floating format support functions, the input options parser
5524
@samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
5525
 
5526
@subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
5527
@cindex @code{obstacks}
5528
 
5529
The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
5530
chunks of memory.  Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
5531
like a stack.  Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
5532
allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
5533
@code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
5534
@code{obstacks}).
5535
 
5536
The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
5537
object files.  There is an obstack associated with each internal
5538
representation of an object file.  Lots of things get allocated on
5539
these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
5540
symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
5541
fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
5542
offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
5543
string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
5544
information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
5545
unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data.  Plus
5546
various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
5547
names of types.
5548
 
5549
An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
5550
that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
5551
various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
5552
once using the @code{obstack_free} function.  The @code{obstack_free}
5553
function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
5554
deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
5555
start the cleanups).  Because of the stack like structure of the
5556
@code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
5557
obstack.  There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
5558
happens.  Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
5559
is allocated to the obstack.  Only the local data is deleted from the
5560
obstack.  Of course this assumes that nothing between the
5561
@code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
5562
else on the same obstack.  For this reason it is best and safest to
5563
use temporary @code{obstacks}.
5564
 
5565
Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se.  It is safe only
5566
under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
5567
longer needed.  In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
5568
when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
5569
new symbol file.
5570
 
5571
@section gnu-regex
5572
@cindex regular expressions library
5573
 
5574
Regex conditionals.
5575
 
5576
@table @code
5577
@item C_ALLOCA
5578
 
5579
@item NFAILURES
5580
 
5581
@item RE_NREGS
5582
 
5583
@item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
5584
 
5585
@item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
5586
 
5587
@item SYNTAX_TABLE
5588
 
5589
@item Sword
5590
 
5591
@item sparc
5592
@end table
5593
 
5594
@section Array Containers
5595
@cindex Array Containers
5596
@cindex VEC
5597
 
5598
Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
5599
objects.  C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
5600
and repetitive.  The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
5601
and using a typesafe vector type.  The functions defined will be
5602
inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
5603
Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
5604
 
5605
An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
5606
The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
5607
the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
5608
bookkeeping.  Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
5609
accidentally mixing up the contents.  Think of these as C++ templates,
5610
but implemented in C.
5611
 
5612
Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
5613
and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
5614
these variants.  Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
5615
pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
5616
stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
5617
dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector.  The scalar
5618
object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
5619
elements are returned by value.
5620
 
5621
There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors.  The iterator
5622
returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
5623
variable passed by reference.  Because the iterator will be inlined,
5624
the address-of can be optimized away.
5625
 
5626
The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
5627
are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
5628
itself.  This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
5629
--- always use a pointer to a vector.  The one exception is the final
5630
field of a structure, which could be a vector type.  You will have to
5631
use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
5632
such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
5633
the @dfn{safe} allocation variants).  The trailing array idiom is used
5634
(rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
5635
@code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
5636
minimal space in the structure containing them.
5637
 
5638
Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
5639
available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants.  The former presumes
5640
that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
5641
(it dies if there is not).  The latter will reallocate the vector, if
5642
needed.  Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
5643
If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
5644
to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
5645
@dfn{quick} operation.  This will ensure there are at least as many
5646
elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
5647
too few spare slots.  If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
5648
but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
5649
is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation.  You
5650
can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
5651
 
5652
You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
5653
remove from the end of the vector.  If you need to remove several items
5654
in one go, use the truncate operation.  The insert and remove
5655
operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
5656
There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
5657
ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
5658
@code{unordered_remove}.  The latter function copies the end element
5659
into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation.  The
5660
@code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
5661
the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
5662
 
5663
If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
5664
accessor will return the address of the start of the vector.  Also the
5665
@code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
5666
vector.  You will not normally need to use these two functions.
5667
 
5668
Vector types are defined using a
5669
@code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro.  Variables of vector
5670
type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro.  The
5671
characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
5672
@var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
5673
(@code{I}) type.  Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
5674
awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one.  There is a
5675
check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
5676
@code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
5677
that is not possible in plain C.
5678
 
5679
An example of their use would be,
5680
 
5681
@smallexample
5682
DEF_VEC_P(tree);   // non-managed tree vector.
5683
 
5684
struct my_struct @{
5685
  VEC(tree) *v;      // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
5686
@};
5687
 
5688
struct my_struct *s;
5689
 
5690
if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
5691
VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
5692
for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
5693
  @{ do something with elt @}
5694
 
5695
@end smallexample
5696
 
5697
The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
5698
accessors provided.  They are enumerated here:
5699
 
5700
@table @code
5701
@item VEC_length
5702
Return the number of items in the array,
5703
 
5704
@item VEC_empty
5705
Return true if the array has no elements.
5706
 
5707
@item VEC_last
5708
@itemx VEC_index
5709
Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
5710
 
5711
@item VEC_iterate
5712
Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
5713
traversed.
5714
 
5715
@item VEC_alloc
5716
@itemx VEC_free
5717
Create and destroy an array.
5718
 
5719
@item VEC_embedded_size
5720
@itemx VEC_embedded_init
5721
Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
5722
 
5723
@item VEC_copy
5724
Duplicate an array.
5725
 
5726
@item VEC_space
5727
Return the amount of free space in an array.
5728
 
5729
@item VEC_reserve
5730
Ensure a certain amount of free space.
5731
 
5732
@item VEC_quick_push
5733
@itemx VEC_safe_push
5734
Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
5735
sure that it is.
5736
 
5737
@item VEC_pop
5738
Remove the last item from an array.
5739
 
5740
@item VEC_truncate
5741
Remove several items from the end of an array.
5742
 
5743
@item VEC_safe_grow
5744
Add several items to the end of an array.
5745
 
5746
@item VEC_replace
5747
Overwrite an item in the array.
5748
 
5749
@item VEC_quick_insert
5750
@itemx VEC_safe_insert
5751
Insert an item into the middle of the array.  Either the space must
5752
already exist, or the space is created.
5753
 
5754
@item VEC_ordered_remove
5755
@itemx VEC_unordered_remove
5756
Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
5757
 
5758
@item VEC_block_remove
5759
Remove a set of items from the array.
5760
 
5761
@item VEC_address
5762
Provide the address of the first element.
5763
 
5764
@item VEC_lower_bound
5765
Binary search the array.
5766
 
5767
@end table
5768
 
5769
@section include
5770
 
5771
@node Coding
5772
 
5773
@chapter Coding
5774
 
5775
This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
5776
algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
5777
 
5778
@section Cleanups
5779
@cindex cleanups
5780
 
5781
Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
5782
later.
5783
 
5784
When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
5785
@code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
5786
the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup.  The
5787
cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
5788
and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
5789
is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
5790
cleanups.  Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
5791
created.
5792
 
5793
Syntax:
5794
 
5795
@table @code
5796
@item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
5797
Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
5798
 
5799
@findex make_cleanup
5800
@item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
5801
Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
5802
@var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later.  The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
5803
handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
5804
@code{discard_cleanups}.  Unless you are going to call
5805
@code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
5806
from @code{make_cleanup}.
5807
 
5808
@findex do_cleanups
5809
@item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5810
Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
5811
@code{make_cleanup} call was made.
5812
 
5813
@findex discard_cleanups
5814
@item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5815
Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
5816
the chain and does not call the specified functions.
5817
@end table
5818
 
5819
Cleanups are implemented as a chain.  The handle returned by
5820
@code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
5821
later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
5822
performed).  E.g.:
5823
 
5824
@smallexample
5825
make_cleanup (a, 0);
5826
@{
5827
  struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
5828
  make_cleanup (c, 0)
5829
  ...
5830
  do_cleanups (old);
5831
@}
5832
@end smallexample
5833
 
5834
@noindent
5835
will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}.  The
5836
cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
5837
be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
5838
 
5839
Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
5840
Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
5841
will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups.  This need leads
5842
to two common cleanup styles.
5843
 
5844
The first style is try/finally.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
5845
@code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
5846
code-block's cleanups are always performed.  For instance, the following
5847
code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
5848
called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
5849
@code{xfree} will always be called:
5850
 
5851
@smallexample
5852
struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
5853
data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
5854
make_cleanup (xfree, data);
5855
... blah blah ...
5856
do_cleanups (old);
5857
@end smallexample
5858
 
5859
The second style is try/except.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
5860
@code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
5861
any created cleanups are not performed.  For instance, the following
5862
code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
5863
an error:
5864
 
5865
@smallexample
5866
FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
5867
struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
5868
... blah blah ...
5869
discard_cleanups (old);
5870
return file;
5871
@end smallexample
5872
 
5873
Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
5874
that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''.  This
5875
means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
5876
interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
5877
functions, since they might never return to your code (they
5878
@samp{longjmp} instead).
5879
 
5880
@section Per-architecture module data
5881
@cindex per-architecture module data
5882
@cindex multi-arch data
5883
@cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
5884
 
5885
The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
5886
specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
5887
architecture object.
5888
 
5889
A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
5890
 
5891
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
5892
@var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
5893
per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
5894
in as a parameter).  Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
5895
architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
5896
and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
5897
@end deftypefn
5898
 
5899
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
5900
@var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
5901
per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}.  Since @var{post_init} is
5902
always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
5903
initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
5904
per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
5905
other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
5906
create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
5907
@end deftypefn
5908
 
5909
These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
5910
identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
5911
 
5912
The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
5913
 
5914
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {void *} gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
5915
Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
5916
@var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
5917
or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
5918
current value of the per-architecture data-pointer.  If the data
5919
pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
5920
corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
5921
@end deftypefn
5922
 
5923
The examples below assume the following definitions:
5924
 
5925
@smallexample
5926
struct nozel @{ int total; @};
5927
static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
5928
@end smallexample
5929
 
5930
A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
5931
per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method.  The module's
5932
per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
5933
creation.
5934
 
5935
In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added.  An
5936
architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
5937
from @code{gdbarch_init}.
5938
 
5939
@smallexample
5940
static void *
5941
nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
5942
@{
5943
  struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
5944
  return data;
5945
@}
5946
@end smallexample
5947
 
5948
@smallexample
5949
extern void
5950
set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
5951
@{
5952
  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5953
  data->total = nozel;
5954
@}
5955
@end smallexample
5956
 
5957
A module can on-demand create architecture dependent data structures
5958
using @code{post_init}.
5959
 
5960
In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
5961
@code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
5962
architecture.
5963
 
5964
@smallexample
5965
static void *
5966
nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5967
@{
5968
  struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
5969
  nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
5970
  return data;
5971
@}
5972
@end smallexample
5973
 
5974
@smallexample
5975
extern int
5976
nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5977
@{
5978
  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5979
  return data->total;
5980
@}
5981
@end smallexample
5982
 
5983
@section Wrapping Output Lines
5984
@cindex line wrap in output
5985
 
5986
@findex wrap_here
5987
Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
5988
or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
5989
added in places that would be good breaking points.  The utility
5990
routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
5991
exceeded.
5992
 
5993
The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
5994
printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there.  This argument is saved
5995
away and used later.  It must remain valid until the next call to
5996
@code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
5997
@code{*_filtered} functions.  Don't pass in a local variable and then
5998
return!
5999
 
6000
It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
6001
space.  If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
6002
indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
6003
the line wraps there.
6004
 
6005
Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
6006
finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
6007
to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output.  Symbol reading routines that
6008
print warnings are a good example.
6009
 
6010
@section @value{GDBN} Coding Standards
6011
@cindex coding standards
6012
 
6013
@value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
6014
@file{etc/standards.texi}.  This file is also available for anonymous
6015
FTP from GNU archive sites.  @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
6016
of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
6017
but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
6018
 
6019
@value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
6020
@value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
6021
 
6022
 
6023
@subsection ISO C
6024
 
6025
@value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
6026
compiler.
6027
 
6028
@value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
6029
 
6030
 
6031
@subsection Memory Management
6032
 
6033
@value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
6034
@code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
6035
 
6036
@value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
6037
@code{xcalloc} when allocating memory.  Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
6038
these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty.  Instead,
6039
they unwind the stack using cleanups.  These functions return
6040
@code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
6041
 
6042
@emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
6043
memory allocation is removed.  These functions provide portable
6044
behavior.}
6045
 
6046
@value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
6047
 
6048
@value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
6049
memory pool.  Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
6050
free a @code{NULL} pointer.
6051
 
6052
@emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
6053
@code{NULL} pointer.}
6054
 
6055
@value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
6056
allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
6057
 
6058
@emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable.  Some systems
6059
restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
6060
 
6061
@value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
6062
function @code{xstrprintf}.
6063
 
6064
@emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail.  Print
6065
functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
6066
errors.}
6067
 
6068
 
6069
@subsection Compiler Warnings
6070
@cindex compiler warnings
6071
 
6072
With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
6073
@samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}.  The exceptions
6074
are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.  The default, when
6075
building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
6076
 
6077
This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
6078
with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags.  Any warnings
6079
from those flags are treated as errors.
6080
 
6081
The current list of warning flags includes:
6082
 
6083
@table @samp
6084
@item -Wall
6085
Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
6086
 
6087
@item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
6088
 
6089
@sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
6090
code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
6091
 
6092
@item -Wpointer-arith
6093
 
6094
@item -Wformat-nonliteral
6095
Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
6096
might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
6097
Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
6098
@code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
6099
but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
6100
 
6101
@item -Wno-pointer-sign
6102
In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
6103
assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
6104
signedness.  However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
6105
carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}.  In early 2006
6106
the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
6107
worth the time it would take.
6108
 
6109
@item -Wno-unused-parameter
6110
Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
6111
unused parameters.  Consequently this warning is avoided.  The macro
6112
@code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
6113
it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
6114
is being used.
6115
 
6116
@item -Wno-unused
6117
@itemx -Wno-switch
6118
@itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
6119
These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
6120
currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
6121
 
6122
@end table
6123
 
6124
@subsection Formatting
6125
 
6126
@cindex source code formatting
6127
The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
6128
strictly.
6129
 
6130
A function declaration should not have its name in column zero.  A
6131
function definition should have its name in column zero.
6132
 
6133
@smallexample
6134
/* Declaration */
6135
static void foo (void);
6136
/* Definition */
6137
void
6138
foo (void)
6139
@{
6140
@}
6141
@end smallexample
6142
 
6143
@emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting.  Function definitions can
6144
be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
6145
 
6146
There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
6147
parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
6148
required by C).  There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
6149
or before a close paren/bracket.
6150
 
6151
While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
6152
more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
6153
after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
6154
whitespace after the semicolon).  Excess whitespace causes difficulties
6155
for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
6156
 
6157
Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
6158
 
6159
@smallexample
6160
void *foo;
6161
@end smallexample
6162
 
6163
@noindent
6164
and not:
6165
 
6166
@smallexample
6167
void * foo;
6168
void* foo;
6169
@end smallexample
6170
 
6171
@subsection Comments
6172
 
6173
@cindex comment formatting
6174
The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
6175
 
6176
Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
6177
@code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
6178
 
6179
@smallexample
6180
/* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger.  If inferior
6181
   gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
6182
   returning.  That is why there is a loop in this function.  When
6183
   this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
6184
   stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands.  */
6185
@end smallexample
6186
 
6187
(Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
6188
comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
6189
 
6190
Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
6191
variable definitions, and the definition itself.
6192
 
6193
In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
6194
than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
6195
line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
6196
than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
6197
 
6198
@subsection C Usage
6199
 
6200
@cindex C data types
6201
Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
6202
host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
6203
of evaluation of expressions.
6204
 
6205
@cindex function usage
6206
Use functions freely.  There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
6207
in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
6208
call, mainly in symbol reading.  Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
6209
limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
6210
 
6211
However, use functions with moderation.  A thousand one-line functions
6212
are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
6213
 
6214
@emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
6215
(But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
6216
protected with parentheses.)
6217
 
6218
@cindex types
6219
 
6220
Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
6221
declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
6222
 
6223
 
6224
@subsection Function Prototypes
6225
@cindex function prototypes
6226
 
6227
Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
6228
a function.  Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
6229
argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
6230
function definition.
6231
 
6232
All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
6233
callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
6234
be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
6235
visible to random source files.
6236
 
6237
Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
6238
that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
6239
 
6240
 
6241
@subsection Internal Error Recovery
6242
 
6243
During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
6244
User errors and internal errors.  User errors include not only a user
6245
entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
6246
object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
6247
Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
6248
run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
6249
 
6250
When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
6251
@code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
6252
 
6253
@value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
6254
 
6255
@emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function.  Either
6256
the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
6257
@code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
6258
error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
6259
 
6260
@subsection File Names
6261
 
6262
Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
6263
case.  Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
6264
unique.  These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
6265
 
6266
@emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
6267
platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS.  Every time an unfriendly file
6268
is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
6269
@file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly.  Compare the
6270
convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
6271
@file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
6272
@file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
6273
 
6274
Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
6275
of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6276
 
6277
@emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
6278
 
6279
When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
6280
@file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
6281
@file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}).  These headers should be relatively
6282
independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
6283
the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
6284
should refer only to system types.  They may be shared between multiple
6285
programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
6286
 
6287
For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
6288
 
6289
 
6290
@subsection Include Files
6291
 
6292
A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
6293
 
6294
A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
6295
declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
6296
indirect inclusion.
6297
 
6298
A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
6299
declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
6300
indirect inclusion.  Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
6301
be directly included.
6302
 
6303
An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
6304
 
6305
An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
6306
Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
6307
pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
6308
 
6309
A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
6310
 
6311
An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
6312
files.  Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
6313
@code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
6314
 
6315
All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
6316
 
6317
@smallexample
6318
#ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
6319
#define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
6320
header body
6321
#endif
6322
@end smallexample
6323
 
6324
 
6325
@subsection Clean Design and Portable Implementation
6326
 
6327
@cindex design
6328
In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
6329
semantics.  Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
6330
experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
6331
trouble.
6332
 
6333
@cindex assumptions about targets
6334
You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
6335
(including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions).  Such things
6336
must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
6337
@value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
6338
such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
6339
 
6340
You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
6341
the target system.  All references to the target must go through the
6342
current @code{target_ops} vector.
6343
 
6344
You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
6345
(except in the ``native'' support modules).  In particular, you can't
6346
assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
6347
host machine.  Target code must bring along its own header files --
6348
written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
6349
copyright problems.
6350
 
6351
@cindex portability
6352
Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon.  It's much better
6353
to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
6354
systems.
6355
 
6356
@cindex system dependencies
6357
New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
6358
or operating systems are unacceptable.  All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
6359
for features.  The information about which configurations contain which
6360
features should be segregated into the configuration files.  Experience
6361
has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
6362
often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
6363
predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
6364
time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
6365
with regard to this feature.
6366
 
6367
Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
6368
target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
6369
 
6370
@cindex portable file name handling
6371
@cindex file names, portability
6372
One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
6373
creep in is handling of file names.  The mainline @value{GDBN} code
6374
assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
6375
a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
6376
directories, case-sensitive file names.  These assumptions are not
6377
necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows.  To avoid
6378
system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
6379
name, use the following portable macros:
6380
 
6381
@table @code
6382
@findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6383
@item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6384
This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
6385
whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family.  Use this
6386
symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
6387
such hosts.
6388
 
6389
@findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
6390
@item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
6391
Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
6392
character.  On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
6393
such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
6394
pass.
6395
 
6396
@findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
6397
@item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
6398
Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
6399
For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
6400
@file{/} is absolute.  On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
6401
@file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
6402
 
6403
@findex FILENAME_CMP
6404
@item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
6405
Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
6406
appropriate for the underlying host filesystem.  For Posix systems,
6407
this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
6408
will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
6409
 
6410
@findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6411
@item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6412
Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
6413
@code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
6414
This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
6415
 
6416
@findex SLASH_STRING
6417
@item SLASH_STRING
6418
This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
6419
absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
6420
@code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
6421
@code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
6422
@end table
6423
 
6424
In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
6425
functions whenever possible.  For example, to extract a directory or a
6426
basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
6427
@code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
6428
platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
6429
with @code{strrchr}.
6430
 
6431
Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
6432
attribute struct.  For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
6433
multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
6434
by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
6435
well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references).  Whenever
6436
something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
6437
using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
6438
@code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
6439
current target_ops structure.  In this way, when a new remote interface
6440
is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
6441
implements the new remote interface.  Other examples of
6442
attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
6443
formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
6444
 
6445
Please avoid duplicating code.  For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
6446
the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
6447
@value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
6448
something was very painful.  In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
6449
consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}.  @file{infptrace.c} can deal
6450
with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
6451
file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
6452
radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
6453
 
6454
All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
6455
@var{module}} command.  Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
6456
messages.  Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}.  Do not use
6457
@code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
6458
 
6459
 
6460
@node Porting GDB
6461
 
6462
@chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
6463
@cindex porting to new machines
6464
 
6465
Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
6466
specifying the configuration of the machine.  Porting a new
6467
architecture to @value{GDBN} can be broken into a number of steps.
6468
 
6469
@itemize @bullet
6470
 
6471
@item
6472
Ensure a @sc{bfd} exists for executables of the target architecture in
6473
the @file{bfd} directory.  If one does not exist, create one by
6474
modifying an existing similar one.
6475
 
6476
@item
6477
Implement a disassembler for the target architecture in the @file{opcodes}
6478
directory.
6479
 
6480
@item
6481
Define the target architecture in the @file{gdb} directory
6482
(@pxref{Adding a New Target, , Adding a New Target}).  Add the pattern
6483
for the new target to @file{configure.tgt} with the names of the files
6484
that contain the code.  By convention the target architecture
6485
definition for an architecture @var{arch} is placed in
6486
@file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.
6487
 
6488
Within @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c} define the function
6489
@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} which calls
6490
@code{gdbarch_register} to create the new @code{@w{struct
6491
gdbarch}} for the architecture.
6492
 
6493
@item
6494
If a new remote target is needed, consider adding a new remote target
6495
by defining a function
6496
@code{_initialize_remote_@var{arch}}.  However if at all possible
6497
use the @value{GDBN} @emph{Remote Serial Protocol} for this and implement
6498
the server side protocol independently with the target.
6499
 
6500
@item
6501
If desired implement a simulator in the @file{sim} directory.  This
6502
should create the library @file{libsim.a} implementing the interface
6503
in @file{remote-sim.h} (found in the @file{include} directory).
6504
 
6505
@item
6506
Build and test.  If desired, lobby the @sc{gdb} steering group to
6507
have the new port included in the main distribution!
6508
 
6509
@item
6510
Add a description of the new architecture to the main @value{GDBN} user
6511
guide (@pxref{Configuration Specific Information, , Configuration
6512
Specific Information, gdb, Debugging with @value{GDBN}}).
6513
 
6514
@end itemize
6515
 
6516
@node Versions and Branches
6517
@chapter Versions and Branches
6518
 
6519
@section Versions
6520
 
6521
@value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
6522
@file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
6523
 
6524
@table @asis
6525
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}
6526
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
6527
an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
6528
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6529
a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
6530
6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
6531
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
6532
a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
6533
6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
6534
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
6535
a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
6536
@var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
6537
may include additional changes
6538
@end table
6539
 
6540
@value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
6541
numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
6542
of 50.  At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
6543
@var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
6544
 
6545
@value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar.  When the branch is cut, the
6546
@var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90.  As draft releases are
6547
drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented.  Once the
6548
first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
6549
@var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
6550
@var{patchlevel}.
6551
 
6552
For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
6553
identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
6554
 
6555
@table @asis
6556
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6557
drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
6558
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6559
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6560
drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
6561
6.1.90.20020304)
6562
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6563
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6564
drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
6565
@end table
6566
 
6567
If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
6568
6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
6569
here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
6570
 
6571
@smallexample
6572
     <HEAD>
6573
        |
6574
6.1.50.20020302-cvs
6575
        |
6576
        +--------------------------.
6577
        |                    <gdb_6_2-branch>
6578
        |                          |
6579
6.2.50.20020303-cvs        6.1.90 (draft #1)
6580
        |                          |
6581
6.2.50.20020304-cvs        6.1.90.20020304-cvs
6582
        |                          |
6583
6.2.50.20020305-cvs        6.1.91 (draft #2)
6584
        |                          |
6585
6.2.50.20020306-cvs        6.1.91.20020306-cvs
6586
        |                          |
6587
6.2.50.20020307-cvs        6.2 (release)
6588
        |                          |
6589
6.2.50.20020308-cvs        6.2.0.20020308-cvs
6590
        |                          |
6591
6.2.50.20020309-cvs        6.2.1 (update)
6592
        |                          |
6593
6.2.50.20020310-cvs         <branch closed>
6594
        |
6595
6.2.50.20020311-cvs
6596
        |
6597
        +--------------------------.
6598
        |                     <gdb_6_3-branch>
6599
        |                          |
6600
6.3.50.20020312-cvs        6.2.90 (draft #1)
6601
        |                          |
6602
@end smallexample
6603
 
6604
@section Release Branches
6605
@cindex Release Branches
6606
 
6607
@value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
6608
single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
6609
branch tags:
6610
 
6611
@smallexample
6612
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
6613
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
6614
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
6615
@end smallexample
6616
 
6617
@emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
6618
release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
6619
date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag.  The
6620
branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
6621
 
6622
@section Vendor Branches
6623
@cindex vendor branches
6624
 
6625
To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
6626
@file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
6627
(an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
6628
its version identifier).  E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
6629
Inc Patch 2)}.
6630
 
6631
@section Experimental Branches
6632
@cindex experimental branches
6633
 
6634
@subsection Guidelines
6635
 
6636
@value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
6637
repository, for experimental development.  Branches make it possible
6638
for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
6639
significant new developments.
6640
 
6641
The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
6642
 
6643
@table @emph
6644
 
6645
@item a branch has an owner
6646
The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
6647
ground rules.  In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
6648
adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
6649
 
6650
@item all commits are posted
6651
All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
6652
@email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org, the @value{GDBN} patches
6653
mailing list}.  While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
6654
should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
6655
 
6656
@item all commits are covered by an assignment
6657
This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
6658
and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
6659
 
6660
@item a branch is focused
6661
A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
6662
unnecessary or irrelevant changes.  Cleanups, where identified, being
6663
be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
6664
 
6665
@item a branch tracks mainline
6666
This keeps the level of divergence under control.  It also keeps the
6667
pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
6668
mainline.
6669
 
6670
@item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
6671
The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
6672
branch (branches of individual files should be avoided).  @xref{Tags}.
6673
 
6674
@item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
6675
The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
6676
the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
6677
@samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
6678
 
6679
@end table
6680
 
6681
@subsection Tags
6682
@anchor{Tags}
6683
 
6684
To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
6685
branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
6686
 
6687
@table @code
6688
 
6689
@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6690
@itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
6691
The branch point and corresponding branch tag.  @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
6692
date that the branch was created.  A branch is created using the
6693
sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
6694
@smallexample
6695
cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
6696
cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
6697
   @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
6698
@end smallexample
6699
 
6700
@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6701
The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
6702
on @var{yyyymmdd}.  To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
6703
use a command sequence like:
6704
@smallexample
6705
cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
6706
cvs update \
6707
   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6708
   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6709
@end smallexample
6710
@noindent
6711
Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
6712
merge.
6713
 
6714
@end table
6715
 
6716
@noindent
6717
For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
6718
@uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
6719
 
6720
@node Start of New Year Procedure
6721
@chapter Start of New Year Procedure
6722
@cindex new year procedure
6723
 
6724
At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
6725
 
6726
@itemize @bullet
6727
@item
6728
Rotate the ChangeLog file
6729
 
6730
The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
6731
@file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
6732
A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
6733
contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog.  The following should
6734
also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
6735
the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
6736
@smallexample
6737
Local Variables:
6738
mode: change-log
6739
left-margin: 8
6740
fill-column: 74
6741
version-control: never
6742
coding: utf-8
6743
End:
6744
@end smallexample
6745
 
6746
@item
6747
Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
6748
in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6749
 
6750
@item
6751
Update the copyright year in the startup message
6752
 
6753
Update the copyright year in:
6754
@itemize @bullet
6755
  @item
6756
  file @file{top.c}, function @code{print_gdb_version}
6757
  @item
6758
  file @file{gdbserver/server.c}, function @code{gdbserver_version}
6759
  @item
6760
  file @file{gdbserver/gdbreplay.c}, function @code{gdbreplay_version}
6761
@end itemize
6762
 
6763
@item
6764
Run the @file{copyright.sh} script to add the new year in the copyright
6765
notices of most source files.  This script requires Emacs 22 or later to
6766
be installed.
6767
 
6768
@item
6769
The new year also needs to be added manually in all other files that
6770
are not already taken care of by the @file{copyright.sh} script:
6771
@itemize @bullet
6772
  @item
6773
  @file{*.s}
6774
  @item
6775
  @file{*.f}
6776
  @item
6777
  @file{*.f90}
6778
  @item
6779
  @file{*.igen}
6780
  @item
6781
  @file{*.ac}
6782
  @item
6783
  @file{*.texi}
6784
  @item
6785
  @file{*.texinfo}
6786
  @item
6787
  @file{*.tex}
6788
  @item
6789
  @file{*.defs}
6790
  @item
6791
  @file{*.1}
6792
@end itemize
6793
 
6794
@end itemize
6795
 
6796
@node Releasing GDB
6797
 
6798
@chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
6799
@cindex making a new release of gdb
6800
 
6801
@section Branch Commit Policy
6802
 
6803
The branch commit policy is pretty slack.  @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
6804
5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
6805
 
6806
@itemize @bullet
6807
@item
6808
The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
6809
@item
6810
Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
6811
trunk.  If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
6812
file is better than committing a hack.
6813
@item
6814
When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
6815
Does it fix a build?  Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
6816
when debugging a static binary?
6817
@item
6818
The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6819
the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6820
@item
6821
Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6822
sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6823
@file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6824
@end itemize
6825
 
6826
@emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6827
functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6828
This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6829
reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6830
 
6831
 
6832
@section Obsoleting code
6833
 
6834
Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6835
code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6836
(an old target, an unused file).
6837
 
6838
Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6839
line.  Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6840
been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6841
 
6842
The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6843
wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6844
Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6845
 
6846
@enumerate
6847
@item
6848
Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sourceware.org, the GDB mailing
6849
list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6850
recommended.
6851
@item
6852
Wait a week or so.
6853
@item
6854
Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, the GDB
6855
Announcement mailing list}.
6856
@item
6857
Wait a week or so.
6858
@item
6859
Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6860
prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6861
@item
6862
Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6863
released.
6864
@item
6865
Remove the obsolete code.
6866
@end enumerate
6867
 
6868
@noindent
6869
@emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6870
hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development.  Firstly it
6871
helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6872
or simply wrong.  Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6873
the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6874
hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6875
 
6876
 
6877
 
6878
@section Before the Branch
6879
 
6880
The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6881
changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created.  For
6882
instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6883
building.  If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6884
@file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6885
 
6886
@subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6887
 
6888
People always forget.  Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6889
something interesting happened add it yourself.  The @code{schedule}
6890
script will mention this in its e-mail.
6891
 
6892
@subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6893
 
6894
Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6895
@file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved.  The
6896
@code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6897
 
6898
@subheading Refresh any imported files.
6899
 
6900
A number of files are taken from external repositories.  They include:
6901
 
6902
@itemize @bullet
6903
@item
6904
@file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6905
@item
6906
@file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6907
file)
6908
@item
6909
@file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6910
@end itemize
6911
 
6912
@subheading Check the ARI
6913
 
6914
@uref{http://sourceware.org/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6915
(Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6916
conventions.  The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6917
of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems.  There shouldn't be any
6918
regressions.
6919
 
6920
@subsection Review the bug data base
6921
 
6922
Close anything obviously fixed.
6923
 
6924
@subsection Check all cross targets build
6925
 
6926
The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6927
 
6928
 
6929
@section Cut the Branch
6930
 
6931
@subheading Create the branch
6932
 
6933
@smallexample
6934
$  u=5.1
6935
$  v=5.2
6936
$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6937
$  D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6938
$  echo $u $V $D
6939
5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6940
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6941
-D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6942
cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag
6943
-D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6944
$  ^echo ^^
6945
...
6946
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6947
-b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6948
cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6949
-b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6950
$  ^echo ^^
6951
...
6952
$
6953
@end smallexample
6954
 
6955
@itemize @bullet
6956
@item
6957
By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6958
date/time.
6959
@item
6960
The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6961
@item
6962
Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6963
@item
6964
@file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6965
@item
6966
The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6967
@end itemize
6968
 
6969
@subheading Update @file{version.in}
6970
 
6971
@smallexample
6972
$  u=5.1
6973
$  v=5.2
6974
$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6975
$  echo $u $v$V
6976
5.1 5_2
6977
$  cd /tmp
6978
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src co \
6979
-r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
6980
cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src co
6981
 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
6982
$  ^echo ^^
6983
U src/gdb/version.in
6984
$  cd src/gdb
6985
$  echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
6986
$  cat version.in
6987
5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
6988
$  cvs -f commit version.in
6989
@end smallexample
6990
 
6991
@itemize @bullet
6992
@item
6993
@file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
6994
mechanism.
6995
@item
6996
@file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
6997
initial branch version number.
6998
@end itemize
6999
 
7000
 
7001
@subheading Update the web and news pages
7002
 
7003
Something?
7004
 
7005
@subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
7006
 
7007
The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
7008
This file needs to be updated so that:
7009
 
7010
@itemize @bullet
7011
@item
7012
A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
7013
@item
7014
The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
7015
@end itemize
7016
 
7017
@noindent
7018
See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
7019
cron table.
7020
 
7021
The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
7022
any changes.  That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
7023
snapshot directories.
7024
 
7025
 
7026
@subheading Update the NEWS and README files
7027
 
7028
The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
7029
to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
7030
refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
7031
 
7032
The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
7033
current release.
7034
 
7035
@subheading Post the branch info
7036
 
7037
Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
7038
 
7039
@itemize @bullet
7040
@item
7041
@email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7042
@item
7043
@email{gdb@@sourceware.org, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
7044
@email{gdb-testers@@sourceware.org, GDB Testers mailing list}
7045
@end itemize
7046
 
7047
@emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
7048
ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
7049
list are alerted.}
7050
 
7051
The announcement should include:
7052
 
7053
@itemize @bullet
7054
@item
7055
The branch tag.
7056
@item
7057
How to check out the branch using CVS.
7058
@item
7059
The date/number of weeks until the release.
7060
@item
7061
The branch commit policy still holds.
7062
@end itemize
7063
 
7064
@section Stabilize the branch
7065
 
7066
Something goes here.
7067
 
7068
@section Create a Release
7069
 
7070
The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
7071
down into a number of stages.  The first part addresses the technical
7072
process of creating a releasable tar ball.  The later stages address the
7073
process of releasing that tar ball.
7074
 
7075
When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
7076
 
7077
@subsection Create a release candidate
7078
 
7079
The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
7080
made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
7081
candidate).
7082
 
7083
@subsubheading Freeze the branch
7084
 
7085
Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
7086
@email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org}.
7087
 
7088
@subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
7089
 
7090
@smallexample
7091
$  b=gdb_5_2-branch
7092
$  v=5.2
7093
$  t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
7094
$  echo $t/$b/$v
7095
/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7096
$  mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
7097
$  cd $t/$b/$v
7098
$  pwd
7099
/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7100
$  which autoconf
7101
/home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
7102
$
7103
@end smallexample
7104
 
7105
@noindent
7106
Notes:
7107
 
7108
@itemize @bullet
7109
@item
7110
Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully.  You want to be using the
7111
version documented in the toplevel @file{README-maintainer-mode} file.
7112
It is very unlikely that the version of @code{autoconf} installed in
7113
system directories (e.g., @file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
7114
@end itemize
7115
 
7116
@subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
7117
 
7118
@smallexample
7119
$  for m in gdb insight
7120
do
7121
( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
7122
done
7123
$
7124
@end smallexample
7125
 
7126
@noindent
7127
Note:
7128
 
7129
@itemize @bullet
7130
@item
7131
The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
7132
any confusion between what is written here and what your local
7133
@code{cvs} really does.
7134
@end itemize
7135
 
7136
@subsubheading Update relevant files.
7137
 
7138
@table @file
7139
 
7140
@item gdb/NEWS
7141
 
7142
Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline.  Minor
7143
releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
7144
 
7145
Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
7146
 
7147
@smallexample
7148
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
7149
...
7150
c-x 4 a
7151
...
7152
c-x c-s c-x c-c
7153
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
7154
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7155
@end smallexample
7156
 
7157
@item gdb/README
7158
 
7159
You'll need to update:
7160
 
7161
@itemize @bullet
7162
@item
7163
The version.
7164
@item
7165
The update date.
7166
@item
7167
Who did it.
7168
@end itemize
7169
 
7170
@smallexample
7171
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
7172
...
7173
c-x 4 a
7174
...
7175
c-x c-s c-x c-c
7176
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
7177
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7178
@end smallexample
7179
 
7180
@emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
7181
before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
7182
to get it updated.}
7183
 
7184
@emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
7185
@file{INSTALL} from the core documentation.  This might be worth
7186
pursuing.}
7187
 
7188
@item gdb/version.in
7189
 
7190
@smallexample
7191
$  echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7192
$  cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7193
5.2
7194
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7195
...
7196
c-x 4 a
7197
... Bump to version ...
7198
c-x c-s c-x c-c
7199
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
7200
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7201
@end smallexample
7202
 
7203
@end table
7204
 
7205
@subsubheading Do the dirty work
7206
 
7207
This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
7208
 
7209
@smallexample
7210
$  for m in gdb insight
7211
do
7212
( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
7213
done
7214
@end smallexample
7215
 
7216
If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
7217
(@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
7218
 
7219
@smallexample
7220
$  for m in gdb insight
7221
do
7222
( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
7223
done
7224
@end smallexample
7225
 
7226
@subsubheading Check the source files
7227
 
7228
You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
7229
@kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't.  Watch out
7230
for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
7231
 
7232
@smallexample
7233
$  ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
7234
M djunpack.bat
7235
? gdb-5.1.91.tar
7236
? proto-toplev
7237
@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7238
M gdb/ChangeLog
7239
M gdb/NEWS
7240
M gdb/README
7241
M gdb/version.in
7242
@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7243
$
7244
@end smallexample
7245
 
7246
@noindent
7247
@emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
7248
@file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}.  They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
7249
was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
7250
didn't get suppressed).  Fixing it would be nice though.}
7251
 
7252
@subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
7253
 
7254
@smallexample
7255
$  cp */src/*.tar .
7256
$  cp */src/*.bz2 .
7257
$  ls -F
7258
gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
7259
$  for m in gdb insight
7260
do
7261
bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
7262
gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
7263
done
7264
$
7265
@end smallexample
7266
 
7267
@noindent
7268
Note:
7269
 
7270
@itemize @bullet
7271
@item
7272
A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
7273
in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
7274
can not include it in the compressed file.  This is also why the release
7275
process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
7276
@end itemize
7277
 
7278
@subsection Sanity check the tar ball
7279
 
7280
Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
7281
 
7282
@smallexample
7283
$  bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
7284
$  cd gdb-5.2
7285
$  ./configure
7286
$  make
7287
@dots{}
7288
$  ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
7289
GNU gdb 5.2
7290
@dots{}
7291
(gdb)  b main
7292
Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
7293
(gdb)  run
7294
Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
7295
 
7296
Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
7297
734       catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
7298
(gdb)  print args
7299
$1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
7300
(gdb)
7301
@end smallexample
7302
 
7303
@subsection Make a release candidate available
7304
 
7305
If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
7306
 
7307
@enumerate
7308
@item
7309
Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
7310
@item
7311
Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
7312
@var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
7313
process can restart.
7314
@item
7315
Make the release candidate available in
7316
@uref{ftp://sourceware.org/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
7317
@item
7318
Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sourceware.org} and
7319
@email{gdb-testers@@sourceware.org} that the candidate is available.
7320
@end enumerate
7321
 
7322
@subsection Make a formal release available
7323
 
7324
(And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
7325
 
7326
@subsubheading Install on sware
7327
 
7328
Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
7329
 
7330
@smallexample
7331
$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
7332
$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7333
@end smallexample
7334
 
7335
@noindent
7336
Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
7337
are available (e.g.@: keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
7338
 
7339
@smallexample
7340
$  cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7341
$  rm @dots{}
7342
@end smallexample
7343
 
7344
@noindent
7345
Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
7346
directory:
7347
 
7348
@smallexample
7349
$  vi README
7350
@dots{}
7351
$  rm -f .message
7352
$  ln README .message
7353
@end smallexample
7354
 
7355
@subsubheading Update the web pages.
7356
 
7357
@table @file
7358
 
7359
@item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
7360
This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
7361
@itemize @bullet
7362
@item
7363
General announcement.
7364
@item
7365
News.  If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
7366
earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
7367
@item
7368
Errata.
7369
@end itemize
7370
 
7371
@item htdocs/index.html
7372
@itemx htdocs/news/index.html
7373
@itemx htdocs/download/index.html
7374
These files include:
7375
@itemize @bullet
7376
@item
7377
Announcement of the most recent release.
7378
@item
7379
News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
7380
@end itemize
7381
These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
7382
 
7383
@item download/onlinedocs/
7384
You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
7385
docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}.  The best way is to look in the output
7386
from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
7387
Something like:
7388
 
7389
@smallexample
7390
$  ~/ss/update-web-docs \
7391
 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7392
 $PWD/www \
7393
 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
7394
 gdb
7395
@end smallexample
7396
 
7397
@item download/ari/
7398
Just like the online documentation.  Something like:
7399
 
7400
@smallexample
7401
$  /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
7402
 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7403
 $PWD/www \
7404
 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
7405
 gdb
7406
@end smallexample
7407
 
7408
@end table
7409
 
7410
@subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
7411
 
7412
Something goes here.
7413
 
7414
 
7415
@subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
7416
 
7417
At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
7418
@file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
7419
 
7420
@subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
7421
 
7422
Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
7423
 
7424
@itemize @bullet
7425
@item
7426
@email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7427
@item
7428
@email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
7429
day or so to let things get out)
7430
@item
7431
@email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
7432
@end itemize
7433
 
7434
@subsection Cleanup
7435
 
7436
The release is out but you're still not finished.
7437
 
7438
@subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
7439
 
7440
In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
7441
 
7442
@itemize @bullet
7443
@item
7444
@file{gdb/ChangeLog}
7445
@item
7446
@file{gdb/version.in}
7447
@item
7448
@file{gdb/NEWS}
7449
@item
7450
@file{gdb/README}
7451
@end itemize
7452
 
7453
@subsubheading Tag the release
7454
 
7455
Something like:
7456
 
7457
@smallexample
7458
$  d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
7459
$  echo $d
7460
2002-01-24
7461
$  ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
7462
$  ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
7463
@end smallexample
7464
 
7465
Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
7466
@value{GDBN}.
7467
 
7468
@subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
7469
 
7470
Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
7471
indicates when the release was made.
7472
 
7473
@subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
7474
 
7475
If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
7476
@kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it.  Having
7477
committed all the release changes it can be set to
7478
@file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
7479
is important - it affects the snapshot process).
7480
 
7481
Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
7482
 
7483
@subsubheading Merge into trunk
7484
 
7485
The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
7486
trunk.
7487
 
7488
@subsubheading Revise the release schedule
7489
 
7490
Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sourceware.org, GDB
7491
Discussion List} with an updated announcement.  The schedule can be
7492
generated by running:
7493
 
7494
@smallexample
7495
$  ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
7496
@end smallexample
7497
 
7498
@noindent
7499
The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
7500
of the most recent release.
7501
 
7502
Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
7503
 
7504
@section Post release
7505
 
7506
Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
7507
 
7508
@node Testsuite
7509
 
7510
@chapter Testsuite
7511
@cindex test suite
7512
 
7513
The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
7514
While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
7515
this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
7516
the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
7517
to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
7518
 
7519
The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework.  The
7520
tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
7521
runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
7522
 
7523
@section Using the Testsuite
7524
 
7525
@cindex running the test suite
7526
To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
7527
testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}.  This just sets up some
7528
environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script.  While
7529
the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
7530
and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails.  When the testsuite is
7531
finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
7532
 
7533
@smallexample
7534
                === gdb Summary ===
7535
 
7536
# of expected passes            6016
7537
# of unexpected failures        58
7538
# of unexpected successes       5
7539
# of expected failures          183
7540
# of unresolved testcases       3
7541
# of untested testcases         5
7542
@end smallexample
7543
 
7544
To run a specific test script, type:
7545
@example
7546
make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
7547
@end example
7548
where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
7549
spaces.
7550
 
7551
If you use GNU make, you can use its @option{-j} option to run the
7552
testsuite in parallel.  This can greatly reduce the amount of time it
7553
takes for the testsuite to run.  In this case, if you set
7554
@code{RUNTESTFLAGS} then, by default, the tests will be run serially
7555
even under @option{-j}.  You can override this and force a parallel run
7556
by setting the @code{make} variable @code{FORCE_PARALLEL} to any
7557
non-empty value.  Note that the parallel @kbd{make check} assumes
7558
that you want to run the entire testsuite, so it is not compatible
7559
with some dejagnu options, like @option{--directory}.
7560
 
7561
The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
7562
conspires to keep us from this ideal.  Unexpected failures indicate
7563
real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite.  Expected
7564
failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
7565
hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
7566
everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
7567
being fixed in the near future.  Expected failures should not be added
7568
lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
7569
Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
7570
reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
7571
catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
7572
program.
7573
 
7574
When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
7575
testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
7576
regressions.  Note that truly complete testing would require that you
7577
run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
7578
compilers; however this is more than really necessary.  In many cases
7579
testing with a single configuration is sufficient.  Other useful
7580
options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
7581
host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
7582
mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
7583
 
7584
If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
7585
tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
7586
and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
7587
Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
7588
failure, please add a test case for it.  Some cases are extremely
7589
difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
7590
in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
7591
tests for all of those.
7592
 
7593
DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines.  However,
7594
some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
7595
the host machine are not the same.  In such an environment, these scripts
7596
will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
7597
 
7598
@smallexample
7599
UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
7600
@end smallexample
7601
 
7602
@section Testsuite Parameters
7603
 
7604
Several variables exist to modify the behavior of the testsuite.
7605
 
7606
@itemize @bullet
7607
 
7608
@item @code{TRANSCRIPT}
7609
 
7610
Sometimes it is convenient to get a transcript of the commands which
7611
the testsuite sends to @value{GDBN}.  For example, if @value{GDBN}
7612
crashes during testing, a transcript can be used to more easily
7613
reconstruct the failure when running @value{GDBN} under @value{GDBN}.
7614
 
7615
You can instruct the @value{GDBN} testsuite to write transcripts by
7616
setting the DejaGNU variable @code{TRANSCRIPT} (to any value)
7617
before invoking @code{runtest} or @kbd{make check}.  The transcripts
7618
will be written into DejaGNU's output directory.  One transcript will
7619
be made for each invocation of @value{GDBN}; they will be named
7620
@file{transcript.@var{n}}, where @var{n} is an integer.  The first
7621
line of the transcript file will show how @value{GDBN} was invoked;
7622
each subsequent line is a command sent as input to @value{GDBN}.
7623
 
7624
@smallexample
7625
make check RUNTESTFLAGS=TRANSCRIPT=y
7626
@end smallexample
7627
 
7628
Note that the transcript is not always complete.  In particular, tests
7629
of completion can yield partial command lines.
7630
 
7631
@item @code{GDB}
7632
 
7633
Sometimes one wishes to test a different @value{GDBN} than the one in the build
7634
directory.  For example, one may wish to run the testsuite on
7635
@file{/usr/bin/gdb}.
7636
 
7637
@smallexample
7638
make check RUNTESTFLAGS=GDB=/usr/bin/gdb
7639
@end smallexample
7640
 
7641
@item @code{GDBSERVER}
7642
 
7643
When testing a different @value{GDBN}, it is often useful to also test a
7644
different gdbserver.
7645
 
7646
@smallexample
7647
make check RUNTESTFLAGS="GDB=/usr/bin/gdb GDBSERVER=/usr/bin/gdbserver"
7648
@end smallexample
7649
 
7650
@item @code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS}
7651
 
7652
When running the testsuite normally one doesn't want whatever is in
7653
@file{~/.gdbinit} to interfere with the tests, therefore the test harness
7654
passes @option{-nx} to @value{GDBN}.  One also doesn't want any windowed
7655
version of @value{GDBN}, e.g., @command{gdbtui}, to run.
7656
This is achieved via @code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS}.
7657
 
7658
@smallexample
7659
set INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS "-nw -nx"
7660
@end smallexample
7661
 
7662
This is all well and good, except when testing an installed @value{GDBN}
7663
that has been configured with @option{--with-system-gdbinit}.  Here one
7664
does not want @file{~/.gdbinit} loaded but one may want the system
7665
@file{.gdbinit} file loaded.  This can be achieved by pointing @code{$HOME}
7666
at a directory without a @file{.gdbinit} and by overriding
7667
@code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS} and removing @option{-nx}.
7668
 
7669
@smallexample
7670
cd testsuite
7671
HOME=`pwd` runtest \
7672
  GDB=/usr/bin/gdb \
7673
  GDBSERVER=/usr/bin/gdbserver \
7674
  INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS=-nw
7675
@end smallexample
7676
 
7677
@end itemize
7678
 
7679
There are two ways to run the testsuite and pass additional parameters
7680
to DejaGnu.  The first is with @kbd{make check} and specifying the
7681
makefile variable @samp{RUNTESTFLAGS}.
7682
 
7683
@smallexample
7684
make check RUNTESTFLAGS=TRANSCRIPT=y
7685
@end smallexample
7686
 
7687
The second is to cd to the @file{testsuite} directory and invoke the DejaGnu
7688
@command{runtest} command directly.
7689
 
7690
@smallexample
7691
cd testsuite
7692
make site.exp
7693
runtest TRANSCRIPT=y
7694
@end smallexample
7695
 
7696
@section Testsuite Configuration
7697
@cindex Testsuite Configuration
7698
 
7699
It is possible to adjust the behavior of the testsuite by defining
7700
the global variables listed below, either in a @file{site.exp} file,
7701
or in a board file.
7702
 
7703
@itemize @bullet
7704
 
7705
@item @code{gdb_test_timeout}
7706
 
7707
Defining this variable changes the default timeout duration used during
7708
communication with @value{GDBN}.  More specifically, the global variable
7709
used during testing is @code{timeout}, but this variable gets reset to
7710
@code{gdb_test_timeout} at the beginning of each testcase, making sure
7711
that any local change to @code{timeout} in a testcase does not affect
7712
subsequent testcases.
7713
 
7714
This global variable comes in handy when the debugger is slower than
7715
normal due to the testing environment, triggering unexpected @code{TIMEOUT}
7716
test failures.  Examples include when testing on a remote machine, or
7717
against a system where communications are slow.
7718
 
7719
If not specifically defined, this variable gets automatically defined
7720
to the same value as @code{timeout} during the testsuite initialization.
7721
The default value of the timeout is defined in the file
7722
@file{gdb/testsuite/config/unix.exp} that is part of the @value{GDBN}
7723
test suite@footnote{If you are using a board file, it could override
7724
the test-suite default; search the board file for "timeout".}.
7725
 
7726
@end itemize
7727
 
7728
@section Testsuite Organization
7729
 
7730
@cindex test suite organization
7731
The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}.  While the
7732
testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
7733
and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
7734
handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run.  The file
7735
@file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
7736
all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
7737
configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
7738
definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
7739
 
7740
The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
7741
subdirectories of those.  The names of the test files must always end
7742
with @file{.exp}.  DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
7743
in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
7744
get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
7745
 
7746
The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
7747
are for.  Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
7748
located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
7749
execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
7750
intelligibility.
7751
 
7752
@table @file
7753
@item gdb.base
7754
This is the base testsuite.  The tests in it should apply to all
7755
configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
7756
The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
7757
ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
7758
for prototypes).
7759
 
7760
@item gdb.@var{lang}
7761
Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C.  Examples are
7762
@file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
7763
 
7764
@item gdb.@var{platform}
7765
Non-portable tests.  The tests are specific to a specific configuration
7766
(host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos.  Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
7767
HP-UX.
7768
 
7769
@item gdb.@var{compiler}
7770
Tests specific to a particular compiler.  As of this writing (June
7771
1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
7772
couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
7773
imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
7774
extensions.
7775
 
7776
@item gdb.@var{subsystem}
7777
Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth.  For
7778
instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
7779
@file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
7780
@end table
7781
 
7782
@section Writing Tests
7783
@cindex writing tests
7784
 
7785
In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
7786
should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
7787
 
7788
You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
7789
includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
7790
However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
7791
instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
7792
calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
7793
 
7794
Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
7795
necessary.  Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
7796
a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}.  Like @code{gdb_test},
7797
@code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
7798
prompts.
7799
 
7800
Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
7801
On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
7802
spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
7803
 
7804
The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
7805
style.  Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
7806
styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
7807
instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
7808
never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
7809
uniformly.
7810
 
7811
@node Hints
7812
 
7813
@chapter Hints
7814
 
7815
Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
7816
appear anywhere else in the directory.
7817
 
7818
@menu
7819
* Getting Started::             Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
7820
* Debugging GDB::               Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7821
@end menu
7822
 
7823
@node Getting Started,,, Hints
7824
 
7825
@section Getting Started
7826
 
7827
@value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
7828
work on it, it can be hard to know where to start.  Fortunately, if you
7829
know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
7830
 
7831
This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
7832
generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
7833
 
7834
Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
7835
comments with those functions or data structures.  If you run across a
7836
function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
7837
explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
7838
free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
7839
out what the comment should say.  If you find a comment which is
7840
actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
7841
 
7842
Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
7843
native dependent files can be in several places.  Sometimes they are
7844
repeated every place the macro is defined.  Sometimes they are where the
7845
macro is used.  Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
7846
default definition of the macro, and the comment is there.  This manual
7847
also documents all the available macros.
7848
@c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
7849
@c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
7850
@c Conditionals})
7851
 
7852
Start with the header files.  Once you have some idea of how
7853
@value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
7854
@file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
7855
code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
7856
 
7857
You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
7858
enhance your understanding of it.  Summarize it, translate it to another
7859
language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
7860
the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
7861
and verify your prediction, etc.  If you are reading code and your eyes
7862
are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
7863
approach.
7864
 
7865
Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
7866
specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
7867
function with the @code{next} command.  Do not use @code{step} or you
7868
will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
7869
calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
7870
(perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
7871
called) of what it does.  This way you can identify which of the
7872
functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
7873
one which you are interested in.  You may need to examine the data
7874
structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
7875
the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
7876
look like.
7877
 
7878
Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
7879
code, rather than actually stepping through it.  The same general
7880
principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
7881
else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
7882
rather than worrying about all its details.
7883
 
7884
@cindex command implementation
7885
A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
7886
a command which invokes that feature.  Suppose you want to know how
7887
single-stepping works.  As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
7888
@code{step} command invokes single-stepping.  The command is invoked
7889
via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
7890
which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
7891
the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
7892
@code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}.  For example, the @code{step}
7893
command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
7894
display} command invokes @code{display_info}.  When this convention is
7895
not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
7896
tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
7897
breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
7898
 
7899
@cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
7900
If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
7901
on @code{bug-gdb}.  But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
7902
wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
7903
@value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
7904
Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
7905
 
7906
@node Debugging GDB,,,Hints
7907
 
7908
@section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7909
@cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
7910
 
7911
If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
7912
fully functional.  Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
7913
Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
7914
debugged in another.  Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
7915
./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
7916
@file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
7917
 
7918
When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
7919
@file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
7920
gdb easier.  The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
7921
in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
7922
gdb.  See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
7923
 
7924
If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
7925
you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
7926
routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
7927
@kbd{M-.}
7928
 
7929
Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
7930
have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
7931
 
7932
@section Submitting Patches
7933
 
7934
@cindex submitting patches
7935
Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
7936
@value{GDBN} users.  In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
7937
Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
7938
changes.
7939
 
7940
The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
7941
This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
7942
 
7943
If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
7944
or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
7945
with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
7946
 
7947
@cindex legal papers for code contributions
7948
The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
7949
copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
7950
of the changes to the Free Software Foundation.  You can get the
7951
standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
7952
and asking for it.  We recommend that people write in "All programs
7953
owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
7954
changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
7955
etc) can be
7956
contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
7957
bureaucracy and filed with the FSF.  We can't start merging changes until
7958
this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7959
since we maintain it for them).
7960
 
7961
Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
7962
feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
7963
Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
7964
header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
7965
each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
7966
needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
7967
@file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}).  If there are a lot of changes for a
7968
single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
7969
 
7970
In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
7971
sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
7972
If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one.  If you leave
7973
out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting.  Etc., etc.
7974
 
7975
The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
7976
install some of the changes.  They'll be returned to you with questions
7977
or comments.  If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
7978
will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
7979
The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
7980
the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
7981
being reworked.  If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
7982
tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
7983
the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
7984
acceptable.
7985
 
7986
If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is.  But we get a lot
7987
of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
7988
installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
7989
reporter or the contributor could have done.  Patches that arrive
7990
complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
7991
they arrive.  The others go into a queue and get installed as time
7992
permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
7993
be for quite some time.
7994
 
7995
Please send patches directly to
7996
@email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
7997
 
7998
@section Build Script
7999
 
8000
@cindex build script
8001
 
8002
The script @file{gdb_buildall.sh} builds @value{GDBN} with flag
8003
@option{--enable-targets=all} set.  This builds @value{GDBN} with all supported
8004
targets activated.  This helps testing @value{GDBN} when doing changes that
8005
affect more than one architecture and is much faster than using
8006
@file{gdb_mbuild.sh}.
8007
 
8008
After building @value{GDBN} the script checks which architectures are
8009
supported and then switches the current architecture to each of those to get
8010
information about the architecture.  The test results are stored in log files
8011
in the directory the script was called from.
8012
 
8013
@include observer.texi
8014
@raisesections
8015
@include fdl.texi
8016
@lowersections
8017
 
8018
@node Index
8019
@unnumbered Index
8020
 
8021
@printindex cp
8022
 
8023
@bye

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.